contract documents and specifications for fema safe … · marcus echols, district iv eddie meeks,...

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

FEMA SAFE ROOM NOVEMBER, 2017

FOR TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS

TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY, MISSISSIPPI

KENNETH “BUCK” HAVENS, VICE PRESIDENT, DISTRICT I JOHNNY GOODWIN, PRESIDENT, DISTRICT II

LARRY COLE, DISTRICT III MARCUS ECHOLS, DISTRICT IV

EDDIE MEEKS, DISTRICT V RANDY WOLFE, COUNTY ADMINISTRATOR

ANITA GREENWOOD, CHANCERY CLERK THOMAS U. REYNOLDS, COUNTY ATTORNEY

GREENWOOD ENGINEERING, INC. KELLY GREENWOOD, P.E.

50 COURT SQUARE CHARLESTON, MS 38921

662-647-3843

02/02/18

TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY COMMUNITY SAFE ROOM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

ADVERTISEMENT EJCDC C-111 2 PAGES

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS EJCDC C-200 14 PAGES

AFFIDAVIT 1 PAGE

NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1 1 PAGE

QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT EJCDC C-451 12 PAGES

BID BOND EJCDC C-430 3 PAGES

BID FORM EJCDC C-410 13 PAGES

NOTICE OF AWARD EJCDC C-510 1 PAGE

AGREEMENT EJCDC C-520 12 PAGES

PERFORMANCE BOND EJCDC C-610 3 PAGES

PAYMENT BOND EJCDC C-615 3 PAGES

NOTICE TO PROCEED EJCDC 1 PAGE

CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT EJCDC C-620 12 PAGES

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY 1 PAGE

GENERAL CONDITIONS EJCDC C-700 79 PAGES

GEOTECH REPORT 18 PAGES

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PROJECT MEETINGS SECTION 01 31 19 1-2

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 33 00 1-9

DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 34 00 1-5

DEFERRED SUBMITTALS SECTION 01 34 50 1

DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS SECTION 01 35 00 1-5

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 40 00 1-9

REFERENCES SECTION 01 42 00 1-16

TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS SECTION 01 50 00 1-8

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 60 00 1-5

EXECUTION SECTION 01 73 00 1-7

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL SECTION 01 74 19 1-2

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 77 00 1-4

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01 78 23 1-7

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 78 39 1-3

DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING SECTION 01 79 00 1-4

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 1-15

CONCRETE FINISHING SECTION 03 35 00 1-2

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT SECTION 04 22 00 1-11

METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 50 00 1-8

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 13 1-6

ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 1-4

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK SECTION 06 44 05 1-8

THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 21 00 1-2

SBS MODIFIED HOT APPLIED ROOFING SECTION 07 52 16 1-10

ROOF SPECIALITIES SECTION 07 71 00 1-5

JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 92 00 1-6

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES SECTION 08 11 13 1-8

FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 21 10 1-4

ACCESS DOORS & FRAMES SECTION 08 31 13 1-3

FEMA P-361 ALUMINUM DOOR SYSTEM SECTION 08 42 13 1-5

FEMA P-361 AUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 08 51 13 1-3

DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 00 1-10

FIXED LOUVERS SECTION 08 91 19 1-3

GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 29 00 1-4

PAINTING SECTION 09 91 00 1-5

DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE SECTION 10 14 19 1-4

PANEL SIGNAGE SECTION 10 14 23 1-4

TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 21 13 1-3

TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 10 28 13 1-5

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS SECTION 10 44 13 1-4

FIRE EXTINGUISERS SECTION 10 44 16 1-2

ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES SECTION 12 48 16 1-3

ELECTRICAL SECTION 16 00 00 1-75

VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16 81 00 1-3

EARTHWORK SECTION 31 01 00 1-14

TIE-IN NEW SERVICE TO EXISTING SEWER SECTION 33 05 5.1 1

EJCDC® C‐111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1

TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS CHARLESTON, MISSISSIPPI

2017 FEMA SAFE ROOM

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Sealed Bids for the construction of the 2017 FEMA SAFE ROOM will be received by TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS, in the office of the CHANCERY CLERK, CHARLESTON COURTHOUSE, CHARLESTON, MS, until 10:00 AM local time on March 12, 2018 at which time the Bids received will be publically opened and read. The Project consists of constructing A NEW STAND ALONE FEMA SAFE ROOM IN CHARLESTON, MISSISSIPPI, LOCATED ON 204 SOUTH MARKET STREET.

The Issuing Office for the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS is: Greenwood Engineering, 50 Court Square, Charleston, MS 38921; Phone: (662) 647-3843; email: [email protected]. The CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, consisting of the Advertisement for Bids, Information for Bidders, Bid, Bid Bond, Agreement, Payment Bonds, Performance Bond, Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed, Change Order, General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda may be examined at the following locations:

Prospective Bidders may examine the Bidding Documents at the Issuing Office on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM, and may obtain copies of the Bidding Documents from the Issuing Office as described below.

Bidding Documents also may be examined at:

1. Dodge Data and Analytics

www.construction.com/dodge/

2. MS Associated Builders and Contractors Online Plan room

www.abcmississippi.org

3. Construction Data

cdclb.cdcnews.com/Free Access Slider

Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office during the hours indicated above. Bidding Documents are available on compact disc (as portable document format (PDF) files) for a non-refundable charge of $_75.00_, including shipping via overnight express service. Alternatively, printed Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office either via in-person pick-up or via mail, upon Issuing Office’s receipt of payment for the Bidding Documents. The non-refundable cost of printed Bidding Documents is $_150.00 per set, payable to “Greenwood Engineering”, plus a non-refundable shipping charge. Upon Issuing Office’s receipt of payment, printed Bidding Documents will be sent via the prospective Bidder’s delivery method of choice; the shipping charge will depend on the shipping method chosen. The date that the Bidding Documents are transmitted by the Issuing Office will be considered the prospective Bidder’s date of receipt of the Bidding Documents. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be available from the Issuing Office. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda if any, obtained from sources other than the Issuing Office.

Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

All contractors and sub-contractors must provide proof of their participation in the E-Verify program.

EJCDC® C‐111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


Regulatory Requirements: MS Code of 1972 for Public Contracting shall govern submittal, opening, and award of bids.

A pre-bid meeting will be held on February 26, 2018 at 2:00 PM at the office of Greenwood Engineering, 50 Court Square, Charleston, MS 38921.

Minority and women’s business enterprises are solicited to bid on this contract as prime contractors and are encouraged to make inquiries regarding potential subcontracting opportunities, equipment, material and/or supply needs.

Tallahatchie County is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Tallahatchie County hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in a contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement will be afforded the full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability, sexual preference, marital or veteran status, or any other legally protected status in consideration for an award.

Owner: Tallahatchie County Board of Supervisors

By: Kelly Greenwood, P.E., P.S.

Title: Engineer

Date: Publish: February 8, 15, 2018 in Sun-Sentinel

+ + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + +

EJCDC® C‐200 (Rev. 1), Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS



Copyright © 2013:

National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794

(703) 684‐2882

www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347‐7474

www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400

(800) 548‐2723

www.asce.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i

SUGGESTED INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1

Article 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ...................................................................................................... 1

Article 3 – Qualifications of Bidders .............................................................................................................. 1

Article 4 – Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program; Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 1

Article 5 – Bidder’s Representations ............................................................................................................. 3

Article 6 – Pre‐Bid Conference ...................................................................................................................... 4

Article 7 – Interpretations and Addenda ...................................................................................................... 4

Article 8 – Bid Security .................................................................................................................................. 5

Article 9 – Contract Times ............................................................................................................................. 5

Article 10 – Liquidated Damages .................................................................................................................. 5

Article 11 – Substitute and “Or‐Equal” Items ............................................................................................... 5

Article 12 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ...................................................................................... 6

Article 13 – Preparation of Bid ...................................................................................................................... 7

Article 14 – Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................. 8

Article 15 – Submittal of Bid ......................................................................................................................... 8

Article 16 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ......................................................................................... 9

Article 17 – Opening of Bids .......................................................................................................................... 9

Article 18 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ...................................................................................... 9

Article 19 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract ................................................................................. 9

Article 20 – Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 10

Article 21 – Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 10

Article 22 – Sales and Use Taxes ................................................................................................................. 11

Article 23 – Contracts to be Assigned ......................................................................................................... 11



ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued.

ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office in the number and format stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid.

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use.

ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, after submitting its Bid and within [_10____] days of Owner’s request, Bidder shall submit (a) written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and present commitments, and (b) the following additional information:

A. [Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located.]

B. [Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.]

C. [Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information; coordinate with provisions of Article 12 of these Instructions, “Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.”]

D. [Other required information regarding qualifications]

3.02 A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information within the times indicated may disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract.

3.03 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.

3.04 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s representations and certifications.

ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

4.01 Site and Other Areas

A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights‐of‐way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.



4.02 Existing Site Conditions

A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions

1. The Supplementary Conditions identify:

a. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site.

b. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

c. reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.

d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply.

4. Geotechnical Baseline Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR). The GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations (“Baseline Conditions”). The GBR is a Contract Document.

The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential subsurface conditions are baselined.

Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices, nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.

C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05



of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.

4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders

A. Bidder shall conduct the required Site visit during normal working hours, and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.

B. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions.

C. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site.

D. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs.

E. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.

4.04 Owner’s Safety Program

A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.

4.05 Other Work at the Site

A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.

ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents;

B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;



C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;

E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;

F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;

G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;

H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder;

I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work; and

J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 6 – PRE‐BID CONFERENCE

6.01 A pre‐Bid conference will be held at the time and location stated in the invitation or advertisement to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in



response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY

8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the form included in the Bidding Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the General Conditions.

8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults.

8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released.

8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within seven days after the Bid opening.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES

9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially completed, and completed and ready for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR‐EQUAL” ITEMS

11.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, and those “or‐equal” or substitute or materials and equipment subsequently approved by Engineer prior to the submittal of Bids and identified by Addendum. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as an “or‐equal” or substitute unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder and has been received by Engineer at least 15 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such



request shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General Conditions. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any such proposed item, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Substitutes and “or equal” materials and equipment may be proposed by Contractor in accordance with Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General Conditions after the Effective Date of the Contract.

11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post‐Bid approvals of “or‐equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.

11.03 If an award is made, Contractor shall be allowed to submit proposed substitutes and “or equals” in accordance with the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS

12.01 A Bidder shall be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of the Work if required by the Bidding Documents (most commonly in the Specifications) to do so. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid.

12.02 Subsequent to the submittal of the Bid, Owner may not require the Successful Bidder or Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity against which Contractor has reasonable objection.

12.03 If required by the bid documents, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five ten days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work:

A. Site Development

B. Concrete Work

C. Masonry Work

D. Electrical

E. Mechanical & Plumbing

F. Roofing

If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.

12.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds



for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions.

12.05 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

12.06 The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s) in excess of the limits stated in SC 7.06.

ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID

13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.

A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein.

B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”

13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown.

13.03 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The partnership’s address for receiving notices shall be shown.

13.04 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the firm’s address for receiving notices shall be shown.

13.05 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and address for receiving notices.

13.06 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture’s address for receiving notices shall be shown.

13.07 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures.

13.08 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form.

13.09 Postal and e‐mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown.

The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.



ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID

14.01 Lump Sum

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form.

14.02 Unit Price

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Bid Form.

B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity” (which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Bid Form) for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.

C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

14.03 Allowances

A. For cash allowances the Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for Contractor's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Paragraph 13.02.B of the General Conditions.

14.04 Price‐Plus‐Time Bids

A. The Owner will consider the time of Substantial Completion commitment made by the Bidder in the comparison of Bids.

B. Bidder shall designate the number of days required to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work and enter that number in the Bid Form as the total number of calendar days to substantially complete the Work.

C. The total number of calendar days for Substantial Completion designated by Bidder shall be less than or equal to a maximum of [____], but not less than the minimum of [____]. If Bidder purports to designate a time for Substantial Completion that is less than the allowed minimum, or greater than the allowed maximum, Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive.

D. The Agreement as executed will contain the Substantial Completion time designated in Successful Bidder’s Bid, and the Contractor will be assessed liquidated damages at the rate stated in the Agreement for failure to attain Substantial Completion within that time.

E. [Bidder shall also designate the time in which it will achieve Milestones, and achieve readiness for final payment. Such time commitments shall be consistent with the “Time of Substantial Completion” to which Bidder commits. The Agreement as executed will contain, as binding Contract Times, Successful Bidder’s time commitments regarding Milestones, as applicable, and readiness for final payment.]

ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID

15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy of the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be



completed and submitted with the Bid security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form.

15.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.” A mailed Bid shall be addressed to [_Tallahatchie County Board of Supervisors, P.O. Box 350, Charleston Court House, Charleston, MS 38921____].

15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened.

ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder.

16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.

16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS

17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and, unless obviously non‐responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.

ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period.

ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the



Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.

19.02 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid.

19.03 Evaluation of Bids

A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.

C. Bid prices will be compared after adjusting for differences in time of Substantial Completion (total number of calendar days to substantially complete the Work) designated by Bidders. The adjusting amount will be determined at the rate set forth in the Agreement for liquidated damages for failing to achieve Substantial Completion, or such other amount that Owner has designated in the Bid Form.

1. The method for calculating the lowest bid for comparison will be the summation of the Bid price shown in the Bid Form plus the product of the Bidder‐specified time of Substantial Completion (in calendar days) times the rate for liquidated damages [or other Owner‐designated daily rate] (in dollars per day).

2. This procedure is only used to determine the lowest bid for comparison and contractor selection purposes. The Contract Price for compensation and payment purposes remains the Bid price shown in the Bid Form.

19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.

19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers.

ARTICLE 20 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to Owner, it shall be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.

ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within ten days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful



Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 22 – SALES AND USE TAXES

22.01 Owner is exempt from [_____] state sales and use taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. (Exemption No. [_____]). Said taxes shall not be included in the Bid. Refer to Paragraph SC‐7.09 of the Supplementary Conditions for additional information.

ARTICLE 23 – CONTRACTS TO BE ASSIGNED

ARTICLE 24 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS

24.01 If the contract price is in excess of $100,000, provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act at 29 CFR 5.5(b) apply.

FF1

NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT

AFFIDAVIT

State of Mississippi County of ________________________ _____________________________________________________, being first duly sworn, deposes and says: That he/she is __________________________________________________________________

(A partner or officer of the firm of, etc.) The party making the foregoing proposal or bid, that such proposal or bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidder or person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price of affiant or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of said bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against Bigfield Water Association, Inc., and/or Quitman County, Mississippi. or any person with interest in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true.

__________________________________________ Signature

__________________________________________ Title

Subscribed and sworn to before me this ________day of __________________, 20____.

_________________________________________ Notary Public

My Commission expires____________________________________. FAILURE TO COMPLETE AND SUBMIT THIS FORM IN DUPLICATE WITH BID PACKAGE WILL RESULT IN THE BID AS SUBMITTED BEING DEEMED NON-RESPONSIVE AND CONSEQUENTLY REJECTED.1

SPECIAL NOTICE TO BIDDERS NO. 1 SUBJECT: Superintendent on the Job Site The Prime Contractor shall have a competent superintendent on the job site at all time while the Work is in progress. The Prime Contractor’s superintendent shall also be on the job site during work being performed by any sub-contractors.

EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 8

QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT

THE INFORMATION SUPPLIED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS

1. SUBMITTED BY:

Official Name of Firm:

Address:

2. SUBMITTED TO:

3. SUBMITTED FOR:

Owner:

Project Name:

TYPE OF WORK:

4. CONTRACTOR'S CONTACT INFORMATION

Contact Person:

Title:

Phone:

Email:



5. AFFILIATED COMPANIES:

Name:

Address:

6. TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:

SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP

Name of Owner:

Doing Business As:

Date of Organization:

PARTNERSHIP


Type of Partnership:

Name of General Partner(s):

CORPORATION

State of Organization:


Executive Officers:

- President:

- Vice President(s):

- Treasurer:

- Secretary:



LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

State of Organization:


Members:

JOINT VENTURE

Sate of Organization:


Form of Organization:

Joint Venture Managing Partner

- Name:

- Address:


- Name:

- Address:


- Name:

- Address:



7. LICENSING

Jurisdiction:

Type of License:

License Number:

Jurisdiction:

Type of License:

License Number:

8. CERTIFICATIONS CERTIFIED BY:

Disadvantage Business Enterprise:

Minority Business Enterprise:

Woman Owned Enterprise:

Small Business Enterprise:

Other ( ):

9. BONDING INFORMATION

Bonding Company:

Address:

Bonding Agent:

Address:

Contact Name:

Phone:

Aggregate Bonding Capacity:

Available Bonding Capacity as of date of this submittal:



10. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Financial Institution:

Address:

Account Manager:

Phone:

INCLUDE AS AN ATTACHMENT AN AUDITED BALANCE SHEET FOR EACH OF THE LAST 3 YEARS

11. CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE:

Current Experience:

List on Schedule A all uncompleted projects currently under contract (If Joint Venture list each participant's projects separately).

Previous Experience:

List on Schedule B all projects completed within the last 5 Years (If Joint Venture list each participant's projects separately).

Has firm listed in Section 1 ever failed to complete a construction contract awarded to it?

YES NO

If YES, attach as an Attachment details including Project Owner's contact information.

Has any Corporate Officer, Partner, Joint Venture participant or Proprietor ever failed to complete a construction contract awarded to them in their name or when acting as a principal of another entity?

YES NO


Are there any judgments, claims, disputes or litigation pending or outstanding involving the firm listed in Section 1 or any of its officers (or any of its partners if a partnership or any of the individual entities if a joint venture)?

YES NO




12. SAFETY PROGRAM:

Name of Contractor's Safety Officer:

Include the following as attachments:

Provide as an Attachment Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total amount of the Bid) OSHA No. 500- Log & Summary of Occupational Injuries & Illnesses for the past 5 years.

Provide as an Attachment Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total amount of the Bid) list of all OSHA Citations & Notifications of Penalty (monetary or other) received within the last 5 years (indicate disposition as applicable) - IF NONE SO STATE.

Provide as an Attachment Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total amount of the Bid) list of all safety citations or violations under any state all received within the last 5 years (indicate disposition as applicable) - IF NONE SO STATE.

Provide the following for the firm listed in Section V (and for each proposed Subcontractor furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total amount of the Bid) the following (attach additional sheets as necessary):

Workers' compensation Experience Modification Rate (EMR) for the last 5 years:

YEAR EMR YEAR EMR YEAR EMR YEAR EMR YEAR EMR

Total Recordable Frequency Rate (TRFR) for the last 5 years:

YEAR TRFR YEAR TRFR YEAR TRFR YEAR TRFR YEAR TRFR



Total number of man-hours worked for the last 5 Years:

YEAR TOTAL NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS YEAR TOTAL NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS YEAR TOTAL NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS YEAR TOTAL NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS YEAR TOTAL NUMBER OF MAN-HOURS

Provide Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total amount of the Bid) Days Away From Work, Days of Restricted Work Activity or Job Transfer (DART) incidence rate for the particular industry or type of Work to be performed by Contractor and each of Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers) for the last 5 years:

YEAR DART YEAR DART YEAR DART YEAR DART YEAR DART

13. EQUIPMENT:

MAJOR EQUIPMENT:

List on Schedule C all pieces of major equipment available for use on Owner's Project.



I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED HEREWITH, INCLUDING ANY ATTACHMENTS, IS TRUE TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF.

NAME OF ORGANIZATION:

BY:

TITLE:

DATED:

NOTARY ATTEST:

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME

THIS DAY OF , 20___ NOTARY PUBLIC - STATE OF

MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS

1. Schedule A (Current Experience).

2. Schedule B (Previous Experience).

3. Schedule C (Major Equipment).

4. Audited balance sheet for each of the last 3 years for firm named in Section 1.

5. Evidence of authority for individuals listed in Section 7 to bind organization to an agreement.

6. Resumes of officers and key individuals (including Safety Officer) of firm named in Section 1.

7. Required safety program submittals listed in Section 13.

8. Additional items as pertinent.



SCHEDULE A CURRENT EXPERIENCE Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:



SCHEDULE B PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE (Include ALL Projects Completed within last 5 years) Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:



SCHEDULE C - LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE

ITEM PURCHASE DATE CONDITION ACQUIRED VALUE

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC® C‐430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013. Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 3

BID BOND

Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

BIDDER (Name and Address): SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): Tallahatchie County Board of Supervisors PO Box 350 Charleston, MS 38921 BID

Bid Due Date: Description (Project Name— Include Location): BOND

Bond Number: Date: Penal sum $ (Words) (Figures)Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal)

Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney) Print Name Print Name

PENAL SUM FORM


Page 2 of 3

Title Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title

Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary. 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation shall be null and void if:

3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre‐paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.

PENAL SUM FORM


Page 3 of 3

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,



BID FORM FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS



Copyright © 2013:



(703) 684‐2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347‐7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548‐2723

www.asce.org





INTRODUCTION

This Bid Form for Construction Contracts (“Bid Form”) has been prepared for use with the Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts (“Instructions”) (EJCDC® C‐200, 2013 Edition); the Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (“Agreement”) (EJCDC® C‐520, Stipulated Sum, or C‐525, Cost‐Plus, 2013 Editions); and the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (“General Conditions”) (EJCDC® C‐700, 2013 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated, and a change in one may necessitate a change in the others. See also the Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C‐800, 2013 Edition) and the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C‐001, 2013 Edition).

The Bid Form assumes a competitive bidding process and the use of a Project Manual that contains the following documentary information for a construction project:

• Bidding Requirements, which include the Advertisement or invitation to bid, the Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form that is suggested or prescribed, all of which provide information and guidance for all Bidders, and Bid Form supplements (if any) such as Bid Bond Form and Qualifications Statement; and,

• Contract Documents, which include the Agreement, performance and payment bonds, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Drawings, and the Specifications. (Note also that the Supplementary Conditions and other Contract Documents may refer to other documents that are provided to or made available to Bidders for reference purposes, but which are not Contract Documents.)

Together, the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents are referred to as the Bidding Documents. (The terms “Bidding Documents,” ”Bidding Requirements,” and “Contract Documents” are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions.) The Bidding Requirements are not Contract Documents because much of their substance pertains to the relationships prior to the award of the Contract, and has little effect or impact thereafter. Many contracts are awarded without even going through a bidding process, and thus have no Bidding Requirements, illustrating that the bidding items are typically superfluous to the formation of a binding and comprehensive construction contract.

The Bid Form itself ordinarily should not be included as one of the Contract Documents. In most cases the pricing information contained in the Bid Form is transferred into the Agreement. However, there are situations where, to avoid errors incident to rekeying, it may prove wise to attach the Bid Form (or a reproduced copy of it) as an exhibit to the Agreement. The likelihood of such errors increases with many unit‐price bid items. The Bid Form should not contain basic contractual provisions since it is only an offer to perform the Work as required by and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Suggested provisions are accompanied by “Notes to User” and bracketed notes and prompts to assist in preparing the Bid Form prior to distribution to prospective Bidders. The provisions have been coordinated with the other forms produced by EJCDC. Much of the language should be usable on most projects, but modifications and additional provisions often will be necessary. When modifying the suggested language or writing additional provisions, the user must check the other documents thoroughly for conflicts and coordination of terms, and make appropriate revisions in all affected documents.

All parties involved in a construction project benefit significantly from a standardized approach in the location of subject matter throughout the documents. Experience confirms the danger of addressing the same subject matter in more than one location; doing so frequently leads to confusion and unanticipated legal consequences. When preparing documents for a construction project, careful attention should be given to the guidance provided in EJCDC® N‐122/AIA® A521, Uniform Location of


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii

Subject Matter (2012 Edition), available at no charge from the EJCDC website, www.ejcdc.org, and from the websites of EJCDC’s sponsoring organizations.

If CSI’s MasterFormat™ is being used for the Project Manual, consult MasterFormat™ for the appropriate document number and number the pages accordingly.

Instructions and restrictions regarding the use of this document are set out in the License Agreement that accompanied the document at the time of purchase. To prepare this document for use on a specific project, (1) remove the cover pages and this Introduction, (2) fill in Project‐specific information and make revisions to the document, following the guidance in the Notes to Users and bracketed notes and prompts, and the advice of legal counsel, and (3) delete the Notes to Users and bracketed notes and prompts.


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

BID FORM

CHARLESTON SAFE ROOM

[Insert Contract Identification and Number]


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Bid Recipient ................................................................................................................................ 1

Article 2 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements ....................................................................................................... 1

Article 3 – Bidder’s Representations ............................................................................................................. 1

Article 4 – Bidder’s Certification ................................................................................................................... 2

Article 5 – Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................... 3

Article 6 – Time of Completion ..................................................................................................................... 5

Article 7 – Attachments to this Bid ............................................................................................................... 5

Article 8 – Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 6

Article 9 – Bid Submittal ............................................................................................................................... 6



ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT

1.01 This Bid is submitted to:

TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS, PO BOX 350, CHARLESTON, MS 38921

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:

A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents, and hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:

Addendum No. Addendum, Date

B. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and any Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance



of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs.

F. Bidder agrees, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and confirms that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.

I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION

4.01 Bidder certifies that:

A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation;

B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;

C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and

D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non‐competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non‐competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the e execution of the Contract.



ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID

5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):

[SUGGESTED FORMATS FOR LUMP SUM BID]

Lump Sum Bid Price $

[or]

Lump Sum Bid Price for Base Bid $

Alternate A [Add] Flag Pole w/base per plans $

Alternate B [Add] Epoxy Seal all CMU Interior Walls full Height $

[or]

Lump Sum Bid Price for Section I only $

Lump Sum Bid Price for Section II only $

Lump Sum Bid Price for Sections I and II $

[and (if applicable)]

Contingency Allowance for Utility Conflicts $ 3,000.00

All specified cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth above, and have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.

[or] [and]

$

Total of All Lump Sums $

[SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR UNIT PRICE BID]

Item No.

Description Unit EstimatedQuantity

Bid Unit Price

Bid Price

Total of All Unit Price Bid Items $

Bidder acknowledges that (1) each Bid Unit Price includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item, and (2)



estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all unit price Bid items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.

Total of Lump Sum and Alternate = Total Bid Price $

[SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR PRICE‐PLUS‐TIME BID]

Total Bid Price $__________.

Total number of calendar days to substantially complete the Work: _______ days.

Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement): $__________ /day.

NOTE(S) TO USER:

[Drafter should fill in the Liquidated Damages Rate, from Agreement, for use by all Bidders.]

Amount for Comparison = Total Bid Price + (Calendar days for completion x Liquidated Damages Rate) = __________.

The purpose of the formula above is only to calculate the lowest price‐plus‐time bid amount for bid comparison purposes. The price for completion of the Work (the Contract Price) is the Total Bid Price.

Bonds required under Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions will be based on the Contract Price.

Guaranteed Maximum Price: $_______________.

Total number of calendar days to substantially complete the Work: _______ days.

Liquidated Damages Rate (from Agreement): $__________ /day. [Drafter should fill in the Liquidated Damages Rate, from Agreement, for use by all Bidders.]

Amount for Comparison = Guaranteed Maximum Price + (Calendar days for completion x Liquidated Damages Rate) = __________.

The purpose of the formula above is only to calculate the lowest price‐plus‐time bid amount for bid comparison purposes. The price for completion of the Work (the Contract Price) is based on the cost of the Work, plus a fee, subject to a guaranteed maximum price, as set forth in the Agreement.

Bonds required under Paragraph 6.01 of the General Conditions will be based on the Contract Price.

[SUGGESTED FORMATS FOR COST‐PLUS‐FEE BID]

The cost of the Work (other than Unit Price and other excluded Work), determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01 of the General Conditions, together with the following fee, and subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price:



NOTE(S) TO USER:

Select one of the following methods to determine the Bidder’s fee.

Contractor’s fee will be a fixed sum of $_______________.

[or]

Contractor’s fee will be determined by applying the following percentages to the various portions of the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 13 of the General Conditions:

Percent

Payroll costs

Material and Equipment Costs

Amounts paid to Subcontractors

Amounts paid to special consultants

Supplemental costs

None of the costs described in Paragraph 13.01.C of the General Conditions will be included in determining Contractor’s fee.

The maximum amount payable to Contractor on account of this percentage fee will not exceed: $_______________.

The Guaranteed Maximum Price to Owner of the Cost of the Work including Contractor’s Fee will not exceed $_______________.

[END OF SUGGESTED BID FORMATS]

ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

[or]

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete on or before _____, and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before _____.

[or]

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete within _____ calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within _____ calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID

7.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:

A. Required Bid security;



B. List of Proposed Subcontractors;

C. List of Proposed Suppliers;

D. List of Project References;

E. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids;

F. Contractor’s License No.: __________ [or] Evidence of Bidder’s ability to obtain a State Contractor’s License and a covenant by Bidder to obtain said license within the time for acceptance of Bids;

G. Required Bidder Qualification Statement with supporting data; and

H. [List other documents and edit above as pertinent]

ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS

8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

NOTE(S) TO USER:

Careful attention to proper use of terms defined in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions is most important.

ARTICLE 9 – BID SUBMITTAL

BIDDER: [Indicate correct name of bidding entity]

By: [Signature]

[Printed name]

(If Bidder is a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: [Signature]

[Printed name]

Title:

Submittal Date:

Address for giving notices:



Telephone Number:

Fax Number:

Contact Name and e‐mail address:

Bidder’s License No.:

(where applicable)

NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other jurisdictions where applicable or required.

EJCDC® C‐510 (Rev. 1), Notice of Award. Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 1

NOTICE OF AWARD

Date of Issuance:

Owner: Owner's Contract No.:

Engineer: Engineer's Project No.:

Project: Contract Name:

Bidder:

Bidder’s Address:

TO BIDDER:

You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated [_________________________________] for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for:

______________________________________________________________________________________ . [describe Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded]

The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is: $ _______ [note if subject to unit prices, or cost‐plus]

[ ] unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically. [revise if multiple copies accompany the Notice of Award]

a set of the Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of this Notice of Award:

1. Deliver to Owner [____]counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder.

2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security [e.g., performance and payment bonds] and insurance documentation as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.

3. Other conditions precedent (if any):

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

Owner:

Authorized Signature

By:

Title: Copy: Engineer

EJCDC® C‐520 (Rev. 1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,



AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)



Copyright © 2013:



(703) 684‐2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347‐7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548‐2723

www.asce.org



EJCDC® C‐520 (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


INTRODUCTION

This Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price) (“Agreement”) has been prepared for use with the Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts (“Instructions to Bidders”) (EJCDC® C‐200, 2013 Edition); the Suggested Bid Form for Construction Contracts (“Bid Form”) (EJCDC® C 410, 2013 Edition); and the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (“General Conditions”) (EJCDC® C‐700, 2013 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated, and a change in one may necessitate a change in the others. See also the Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C‐800, 2013 Edition), and the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C‐001, 2013 Edition).

In construction contracting, as a general matter the “agreement” is the legal instrument executed (signed) by the project owner and the construction contractor, binding the parties to the terms of the contract. See CSI Project Delivery Practice Guide (2011), Section 11.1.2, p. 210, and CSI Construction Specification Practice Guide (2011), Section 5.1, p. 75. This EJCDC Agreement form serves that basic function, by identifying the parties and Contract Documents, and establishing the Contract Price and Contract Times. This Agreement form is specifically intended for stipulated price (fixed price) contracts—that is, contracts in which Owner and Contractor identify specific lump sums and unit prices as Contractor’s compensation for performing the Work. For construction contracts in which the Contract Price is primarily based on costs incurred during construction, users should select EJCDC® C‐525, Agreement between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Cost‐Plus).

This Agreement form is drafted to be flexible enough to be used on projects that are competitively bid, and for public and private contracts that are negotiated or awarded through a proposal process or otherwise. On competitively bid projects, the following documentary information would typically be made available to bidders:

• Bidding Requirements, which include the Advertisement or invitation to bid, the Instructions to Bidders, and the Bid Form that is suggested or prescribed, all of which provide information and guidance for all Bidders, and Bid Form supplements (if any) such as Bid Bond and Qualifications Statement.

• Contract Documents, which include the Agreement, performance and payment bonds, the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Drawings, and the Specifications.

• Documents referred to in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere as being of interest to bidders for reference purposes, but which are not Contract Documents.

Together, the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents are referred to as the Bidding Documents. (The terms “Bidding Documents,” “Bidding Requirements,” and "Contract Documents" are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions.) The Bidding Requirements are not Contract Documents because much of their substance pertains to the relationships prior to the award of the Contract and has little effect or impact thereafter. Many contracts are awarded without even going through a bidding process, and thus have no Bidding Requirements, illustrating that the bidding items are typically superfluous to the formation of a binding and comprehensive construction contract. In some cases, however, a bid or proposal will contain numerous line items and their prices; in such case the actual bid or proposal document may be attached as an exhibit to the Agreement to avoid extensive rekeying.

EJCDC® C‐520 (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,


Suggested provisions are accompanied by “Notes to User” and bracketed notes and prompts to assist in preparing the Agreement. The provisions have been coordinated with the other forms produced by EJCDC. Much of the language should be usable on most projects, but modifications and additional provisions will often be necessary. When modifying the suggested language or writing additional provisions, the user must check the other documents thoroughly for conflicts and coordination of terms, and make appropriate revisions in all affected documents.

All parties involved in construction projects benefit significantly from a standardized approach in the location of subject matter throughout the documents. Experience confirms the danger of addressing the same subject matter in more than one location; doing so frequently leads to confusion and unanticipated legal consequences. When preparing documents for a construction project, careful attention should be given to the guidance provided in EJCDC® N‐122/AIA® A521, Uniform Location of Subject Matter (2012 Edition), available at no charge from the EJCDC website, www.ejcdc.org, and from the websites of EJCDC’s sponsoring organizations.

CSI MasterFormat™ (50‐Division format) designates Document “00 52 XX” for various forms of the owner‐contractor agreement. If this format is used, the first page of the Agreement would be numbered 00 52 13‐1 (or other appropriate third pair of numbers, in accordance with MasterFormat™).

Instructions and restrictions regarding the use of this document are set out in the License Agreement that accompanied the document at the time of purchase. To prepare the Agreement for inclusion in a Project Manual or for use in a specific contractual engagement, (1) remove the cover pages and this Introduction, (2) fill in Project‐specific information and make revisions to the Agreement, following the guidance in the Notes to Users and bracketed notes and prompts, and the advice of legal counsel, and (3) delete the Notes to Users and bracketed notes and prompts.



AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Tallahatchie County Board of Supervisors (“Owner”) and

(“Contractor”).

Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows:

ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT

2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as follows: Charleston Safe Room

ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER

3.01 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Greenwood Engineering

3.02 The Owner has retained Kelly Greenwood (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES

4.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Contract Times: Dates

A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before _____, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before _____.

[or]

4.02 Contract Times: Days

A. The Work will be substantially completed within _____ days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within _____ days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.



B. Parts of the Work shall be substantially completed on or before the following Milestone(s):

1. Milestone 1 [event & date/days]



4.03 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty):

1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $_______ for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in Paragraph 4.02.A above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.

2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $300.00 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.

4. Milestones: Contractor shall pay Owner $_______ for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for achievement of Milestone 1, until Milestone 1 is achieved.

B. Bonus: Contractor and Owner further recognize the Owner will realize financial and other benefits if the Work is completed prior to the time specified for Substantial Completion. Accordingly, Owner and Contractor agree that as a bonus for early completion, Owner shall pay Contractor $__________ for each day prior to the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) that the Work is substantially complete. The maximum value of the bonus shall be limited to $__________.

4.04 Special Damages

A. In addition to the amount provided for liquidated damages, Contractor shall reimburse Owner (1) for any fines or penalties imposed on Owner as a direct result of the Contractor’s failure to attain Substantial Completion according to the Contract Times, and (2) for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is substantially complete.



B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the actual costs reasonably incurred by Owner for engineering, construction observation, inspection, and administrative services needed after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 for Work to be completed and ready for final payment (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract), until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE

5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract:

A. For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of: $__________.

All specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.

B. For all Unit Price Work, an amount equal to the sum of the extended prices (established for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work by multiplying the unit price times the actual quantity of that item):

Unit Price Work

Item No.

Description Unit EstimatedQuantity

Unit Price

Extended Price

Total of all Extended Prices for Unit Price Work (subject to final adjustment based on actual quantities)

$

The extended prices for Unit Price Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Contract are based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions, estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by Engineer.

C. Total of Lump Sum Amount and Unit Price Work (subject to final Unit Price adjustment) $__________.

D. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.

ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions.



6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 20th day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract.

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract

a. 95% percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; the retainage may be reduced to 2.5%, and

b. 95% percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).

B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to __100%___ percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less _300____ percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.

ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST

7.01 All amounts not paid when due shall bear interest at the rate of 10% percent per annum.

ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS

8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.



C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs.

F. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.

G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

9.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 16, inclusive).

2. Performance bond (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

3. Payment bond (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

4. Other bonds.

a. ___ (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).



NOTE(S) TO USER:

Such other bonds might include maintenance or warranty bonds intended to manage risk after completion of the Work.

5. General Conditions (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

6. Supplementary Conditions (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.

8. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of ___ sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: ___ [or] the Drawings listed on the attached sheet index.

9. Addenda (numbers ___ to ___, inclusive).

10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):

a. Contractor’s Bid (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed.

b. Work Change Directives.

c. Change Orders.

d. Field Orders.

B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS

10.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.

10.02 Assignment of Contract

A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.



10.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

10.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.

10.05 Contractor’s Certifications

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 10.05:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non‐competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non‐competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract.

10.06 Other Provisions

A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are based on EJCDC® C‐700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract, published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee®, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.

This Agreement will be effective on __________ (which is the Effective Date of the Contract).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

By: By:

Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: Attest:

Title: Title:

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

License No.:

(where applicable)

(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.)

NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other jurisdictions where applicable or required.

EJCDC® C‐610, Performance Bond

Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 1 of 3

PERFORMANCE BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location):

BOND Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal) Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature Signature (attach power of attorney) Print Name Print Name Title Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.



1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence,

to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non‐performance of the Contractor.

8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.



10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

14. Definitions

14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims

for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C‐615, Payment Bond


PAYMENT BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location):

BOND

Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement

of the Construction Contract):

Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally

bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below,

do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly

executed by an authorized officer, agent, or

representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,

5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non‐

payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the



materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the

address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

6. If a notice of non‐payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non‐payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated

to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

1. The name of the Claimant; 2. The name of the person for whom the labor

was done, or materials or equipment furnished;



3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;

5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C‐550, Notice to Proceed. Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 1

NOTICE TO PROCEED

Owner: Owner's Contract No.:

Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:

Engineer: Engineer's Project No.:

Project: Contract Name:

Effective Date of Contract:

TO CONTRACTOR: Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on [_____________________, 20__]. [see Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions] On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement, [the date of Substantial Completion is ________________________, and the date of readiness for final payment is_____________________] or [the number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is _____________________, and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is _____________________]. Before starting any Work at the Site, Contractor must comply with the following:

[Note any access limitations, security procedures, or other restrictions]

Owner:

Authorized Signature By:

Title:

Date Issued: Copy: Engineer

Contractor's Application for Payment No.Application Application Date:

Period:

To From (Contractor): Via (Engineer):

(Owner):

Project: Contract:

Owner's Contract No.: Contractor's Project No.: Engineer's Project No.:

1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE............................................................ $

2. Net change by Change Orders.................................................................. $

3. Current Contract Price (Line 1 ± 2)......................................................... $

4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE

(Column F total on Progress Estimates)................................................... $

5. RETAINAGE:

a. X Work Completed.......... $

b. X Stored Material............ $

c. Total Retainage (Line 5.a + Line 5.b).............................. $

6. AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5.c)............................. $

7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 from prior Application)........ $

8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION................................................... $

9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE

(Column G total on Progress Estimates + Line 5.c above)...................... $

Contractor's Certification

Payment of: $

is recommended by:

Payment of: $

is approved by:

Contractor Signature

By: Date: Approved by:

Approved Change Orders

Additions

TOTALS

Application For Payment

Change Order Summary

Number Deductions

(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)

(Date)

Funding or Financing Entity (if applicable)

(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)

NET CHANGE BY

CHANGE ORDERS

(Date)

(Date)(Engineer)

(Owner)

The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following:(1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by prior Applications for Payment;(2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and(3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not defective.

EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 12

Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work

For (Contract): Application Number:

Application Period: Application Date:

B C D Materials Presently Total Completed Balance to Finish

Stored (not in C or D) and Stored to Date (B - F)

(C + D + E)From Previous Application

(C+D)

Totals

% (F / B)

GE

Specification Section No.

Description

Contractor's Application

Scheduled Value ($)

A

This Period

FWork Completed


Page 2 of 12

Progress Estimate - Unit Price Work Contractor's Application



A B C D E F

% (F / B) Bid Item No. Description

Balance to Finish (B - F)

Contract Information

Item Quantity

Units Unit PriceTotal Value of Item ($)

ItemEstimated Quantity Installed

Value of Work Installed to

Date

Materials Presently Stored (not in C)

Total Completed and Stored to Date

(D + E)

Totals


Page 3 of 12

Stored Material Summary Contractor's Application



B E G

Supplier Invoice No.

Submittal No. (with

Specification Section No.)

A C

Bid Item No.

Storage Location

Description of Materials or Equipment Stored

D FStored Previously Incorporated in Work

Date Placed into Storage

(Month/Year)

Amount ($)

Date (Month/ Year)

Amount ($)

Materials Remaining in Storage ($) (D + E - F)

Amount Stored this Month ($)

Subtotal Amount Completed and Stored to Date

(D + E)

Totals


Page 4 of 12

RUS Bulletin 1780-26 Exhibit I

Page 1

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY AND AGENCY CONCURRENCE

CERTFICATE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY

PROJECT NAME:

CONTRACTOR NAME:

I, the undersigned, , the duly authorized and acting legal representative of , do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the attached Contract(s) and performance and payment bond(s) and the manner of execution thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements is adequate and has been duly executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that said representatives have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with the terms, conditions, and provisions thereof.

Name Date

AGENCY CONCURRENCE

As lender or insurer of funds to defray the costs of this Contract, and without liability for any payments thereunder, the Agency hereby concurs in the form, content, and execution of this Agreement.

Agency Representative Date

Name

Kelly

Typewritten Text

ATT 1

EJCDC® C‐700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,



STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT



These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C‐520, Stipulated Sum, or C‐525, Cost‐Plus, 2013 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other.

To prepare supplementary conditions that are coordinated with the General Conditions, use EJCDC’s Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C‐800, 2013 Edition). The full EJCDC Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C‐001, 2013 Edition).

Copyright © 2013:



(703) 684‐2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347‐7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548‐2723

www.asce.org

The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.




STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6

2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7

2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 9

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10

4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10

4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10

4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 11

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12

5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 13

5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15



5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site....................................................................... 16

Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 18

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 18

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 18

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 19

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23

6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 26

Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26

7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 27

7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27

7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 30

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31

7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 32

7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32

7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32

7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32

7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 33

7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 34

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 34

7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36

7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37

Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38

8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38

8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39

8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 40

9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40

9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40

9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40

9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40

9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 41

9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 41

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41

9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41

10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41

10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41

10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 45

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 45

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 45

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 45

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 45

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 46

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 46

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 46

11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 47

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 47

11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 47

11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 48

11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 49

11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 49

11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 50

Article 12 – Claims ......................................................................................................................... 50


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 50

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 51

13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 51

13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 54

13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 54

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 55

14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 55

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 55

14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 56

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 56

14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 57

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 57

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 57

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set‐Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 58

15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 58

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 61

15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 61

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 62

15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 63

15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 63

15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 64

15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 64

Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 65

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 65

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 65

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 66

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 66

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 67

17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 67

Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 67

18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 67

18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 67

18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 68


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v

18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 68

18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 68

18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 68

18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 68

18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 68



ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda.

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.

8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract. The Change Order form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C‐941. Agency approval is required before Change Orders are effective.

9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set‐off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.

10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision



regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material.

12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work.

13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract.

14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .

15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work.

16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work.

17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.

18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective.

20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition.

23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.

24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract‐related funds, real property, or personal property.



25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid.

27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work.

28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract.

29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start‐up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part.

31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes.

32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.

33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities.

35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.

37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights‐of‐way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.



38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.

39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.

42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions.

43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.

44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.

45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start‐up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.

48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer,



ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. A Work Change Directive cannot change Contract Price or Contract Times without a subsequent Change Order.

49. Abnormal Weather Conditions – Conditions of extreme or unusual weather for a given region, elevation, or season as determined by the Engineer. Extreme or unusual weather that is typical for a given region, elevation, or season should not be considered Abnormal Weather Conditions.

50. Agency – the Project is financed in whole or in part by USDA Rural Utilities Service pursuant to the Consolidated Farm and Rural Development Act (7 USC Section 1921 et seq.). the Rural Utilities Service programs are administered through the USDA Rural Development offices; therefore, the Agency for these documents is USDA Rural Development.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or



some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well‐known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.

C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four five printed copies of the Contract Documents (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer.

2.03 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:



1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and

3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work.

2.06 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project‐related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a secure Project website.



B. Deleted

C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.

ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern.

D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations

1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer.



3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents

A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and



binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier.

4.02 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.

4.03 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be



responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times.

2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.

B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.

C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions; Abnormal Weather Conditions;

3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and

4. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5.



E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.

F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.

G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.

ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

5.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of



each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. NO REPORTS OF EXPLORATIONS OR TESTS OF SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AT OR ADJACENT TO THE SITE, OR DRAWINGS OF PHYSICAL CONDITIONS RELATING TO EXISTING SURFACE OR SUBSURFACE STRUCTURES AT THE SITE, ARE KNOWN TO OWNER.

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine



the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.

C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.

D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A;

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or

b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later



than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.

5.05 Underground Facilities

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.



E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question;

b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and

d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question.

5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site

A. NO REPORTS OR DRAWINGS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT THE SITE ARE KNOWN TO OWNER.

B. NOT USED.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern.

E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm



such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set‐off against payments to account for the associated costs.

F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.

G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set‐off.

H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.

I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.



K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney‐in‐fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney‐in‐fact signed the accompanying bond.

C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts.

D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above.

E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work.

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions

A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions.

B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the



Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A‐VII or better.

C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self‐insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self‐insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.

F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage.

G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set‐off against payment, and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.

I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.

J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract.

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts.



2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable).

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees (by stop‐gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s compensation states).

4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).

B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:

1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees.

2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.

3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.

C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements:

1. Products and completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.

2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.

3. Broad form property damage coverage.

4. Severability of interest.

5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.

6. Personal injury coverage.

7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their equivalent.

8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent.

D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.

E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general



liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to industry‐standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies.

F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third‐party injury and property damage claims, including clean‐up costs, as a result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.

G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non‐contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.

H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor.

I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:

1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.

2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.

3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other insured under the policy.

4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.



J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.

K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions:

State: Statutory

Federal, if applicable (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory

Jones Act coverage, if applicable:

Bodily injury by accident, each accident $

Bodily injury by disease, aggregate $

Employer’s Liability:

Bodily injury, each accident $ 1,000,000

Bodily injury by disease, each employee $ 1,000,000

Bodily injury/disease aggregate $ 1,000,000

For work performed in monopolistic states, stop‐gap liability coverage shall be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of: $ N/A

Foreign voluntary worker compensation Statutory

2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and 6.03.C of the General Conditions:

General Aggregate $ 2,000,000

Products ‐ Completed Operations Aggregate $ 2,000,000

Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000

Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $ 1,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions:

Bodily Injury:

Each person $ 1,000,000

Each accident $ 1,000,000



Property Damage:

Each accident $ 1,000,000

[or]

Combined Single Limit of $

4. Excess or Umbrella Liability:

Per Occurrence $ 1,000,000

General Aggregate $ 2,000,000

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.

6.05 Property Insurance

A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as “insureds.”

2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.



3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner‐furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures.

4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).

5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).

6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.

7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.

9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered.

10. not include a co‐insurance clause.

11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.

12. include performance/hot testing and start‐up.

13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is complete.

B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured.

C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.

D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may



come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.

F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what amount.

6.06 Waiver of Rights

A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them.



D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim.

B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order, if needed.

ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.

7.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays,



Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted. Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below.

1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service. and

4) Deleted.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and



2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or‐equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or‐equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or‐equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or‐equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or‐equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or‐equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents.

E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or‐equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05.

7.05 Substitutes

A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site.

1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor.

2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.

3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,

2) be similar in substance to that specified, and

3) be suited to the same use as that specified.



b. will state:

1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times,

2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and

3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.

c. will identify:

1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and

2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.

d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense.

F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal.



7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The Contractor shall not award work valued at more than fifty percent of the Contract Price to Subcontractor(s), without prior written approval of the Owner.

B. Deleted

C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.

D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.

E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity.

F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.

G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.

I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.

J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work.

K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner,



except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein.

L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.

N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier.

O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or



resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

7.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work

7.09 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.

7.10 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value‐added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

7.11 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer.



7.12 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.



7.13 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

7.15 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.



B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

2. Samples:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.

b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.



5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.

8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;



3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.

D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.

7.18 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless



such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

8.01 Other Work

A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third‐party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site.

B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor



may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected.

D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.

8.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work:

1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors;

2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.

8.03 Legal Relationships

A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner for whom the Owner is responsible causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to



Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph.

C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor.

D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.

ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.

9.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

9.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

9.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.

B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.



C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

9.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6.

9.07 Change Orders

A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B.

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06.

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).

9.12 Safety Programs

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.

B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract.

10.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such



visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

10.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.

1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the work in general shall be with engineer and contractor. RPR's dealings with subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and approval of contractor. RPR shall generally communicate with owner only with the knowledge of and under the direction of engineer.

2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of shop drawing and sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by contractor and consult with engineer concerning acceptability.

3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project‐related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.

4. Liaison:

a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.

b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on‐Site operations.



c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work.

5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer.

6. Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor‐approved Shop Drawings.

b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.

c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.

7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, together with RPR’s recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer.

8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:

a. Conduct on‐Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.

b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval.

9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start‐ups:

a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start‐ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof.

b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start‐ups.

10. Records:

a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site, weather conditions, data



relative to questions of Change Orders, Field Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors, deliveries of equipment or materials, daily activities, decisions, observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer.

b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e‐mail addresses, web site locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and major Suppliers of materials and equipment.

c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.

11. Reports:

a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.

b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from Contractor.

c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition.

12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work.

13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work.

14. Completion:

a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.

b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied.

c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.



C. The RPR shall not:

1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or‐equal” items).

2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.

3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers.

4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work.

5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor.

6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off‐site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.

7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor.

8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16.

B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19.

C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.

D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to



exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.

B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed.

ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order.

1. Change Orders:

a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times.

b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification



ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.

3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.

11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.

11.04 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or



2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a and 11.04.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.

11.05 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.



11.06 Change Proposals

A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set‐off against payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.

2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.

3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.

B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.

11.07 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;

2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set‐off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set‐off;

3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work



involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters; and

4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.

B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed.

C. All Contract Change Orders must be concurred in by Agency before they are effective.

11.08 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS

12.01 Claims

A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article:

1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;

2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and

3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.

B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.

C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.



D. Mediation:

1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator.

3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one‐half of the mediator’s fees and costs.

E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.

F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.

G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.

ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

13.01 Cost of the Work

A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:

1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost‐plus‐fee, time‐and‐materials, or other cost‐based terms; or

2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set‐off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment.

B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items:



1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.



e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.

D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost‐plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set‐off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.

E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in



accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

13.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:

1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Deleted

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

13.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph.

E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a



decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.

ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

14.01 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.

B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required:

1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work;

3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;

4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and

5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.



F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

14.03 Defective Work

A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.

B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work.

C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.

D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.

E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.

F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15.

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.



14.05 Uncovering Work

A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.

B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.

C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15.

2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective.

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.



C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set‐offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET‐OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD

15.01 Progress Payments

A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost‐based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.

B. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. No payments will be made that would deplete the retainage, place in escrow any funds that are required for retainage, or invest the retainage for the benefit of the Contractor.

4. The Application for Payment form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C‐620. The Agency must approve all Applications for Payment before payment is made.

C. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing



Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.



6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set‐offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or

e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents.

D. Payment Becomes Due:

1. The Application for Payment with Engineer’s recommendations will be presented to the Owner and Agency for consideration. If both the Owner and Agency find the Application for Payment acceptable, the recommended amount less any reduction under the provisions of Paragraph 15.01.E will become due twenty (20) days after the Application for Payment is presented to the Owner, and the Owner will make payment to the Contractor.

E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:

1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set‐offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set‐off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non‐compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement;

b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;

c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred;



j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;

k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended.

2. If Owner imposes any set‐off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner no later than the time of payment by Owner.

15.03 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver



to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work.

E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above.

F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list.

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work.

2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance.



15.05 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.06 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set‐offs against payment that are necessary in



Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.

C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.

D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to set‐offs for liquidated damages and set‐offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.

15.07 Waiver of Claims

A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.

15.08 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions:

1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;

2. correct such defective Work;

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not



limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);

2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents;

3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or

4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:

1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that the Contract is terminated; and

2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.

C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take



possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.

E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and

3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then



Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph.

ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

17.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article:

1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and

2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.

B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner or Contractor may:

1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or

3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS

18.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice.

18.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period



falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

18.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.

18.04 Limitation of Damages

A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

18.05 No Waiver

A. A party’s non‐enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.

18.06 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

18.07 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

18.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.

18.09 Tribal Sovereignty

A. No provision of this Agreement will be construed by any of the signatories as abridging or debilitating any sovereign powers of the Choctaw Tribe; affecting the trust‐beneficiary relationship between the Secretary of the Interior, Tribe, and Indian landowner(s); or interfering with the government‐to‐government relationship between the United States and the Tribe.

ARTICLE 19 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

19.01 Agency Not a Party

A. This Contract is expected to be funded in part with funds provided by Agency. Neither Agency, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees is a party to this Contract.

19.02 Contract Approval

A. Owner and Contractor will furnish Owner’s Attorney such evidence as required so that Owner’s Attorney can complete and execute the following “Certificate of Owner’s



Attorney” (Attachment GC‐A) before Owner submits the executed Contract Documents to Agency for approval.

B. Concurrence by Agency in the award of the Contract is required before the Contract is effective.

19.03 Conflict of Interest

A. Contractor may not knowingly contract with a supplier or manufacturer if the individual or entity who prepared the plans and specifications has a corporate or financial affiliation with the supplier or manufacturer. Owner’s officers, employees, or agents shall not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: (i) the employee, officer or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their partner or (iv) an organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a financial interest in Contractor. Owner’s officers, employees, or agents shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from Contractor or subcontractors.

19.04 Gratuities

A. If Owner finds after a notice and hearing that Contractor, or any of Contractor’s agents or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise) to any official, employee, or agent of Owner or Agency in an attempt to secure this Contract or favorable treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations related to the performance of this Contract, Owner may, by written notice to Contractor, terminate this Contract. Owner may also pursue other rights and remedies that the law or this Contract provides. However, the existence of the facts on which Owner bases such findings shall be an issue and may be reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract.

B. in the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph 19.04.A, Owner may pursue the same remedies against Contractor as it could pursue in the event of a breach of this Contract by Contractor. As a penalty, in addition to any other damages to which it may be entitled by law, Owner may pursue exemplary damages in an amount (as determined by Owner) which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs Contractor incurs I providing any such gratuities to any such officer or employee.

19.05 Audit and Access to Records

A. Owner, Agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives, shall have access to any books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor which are pertinent to the Agreement, for the purpose of making audits, examinations, excerpts, and transcriptions. Engineer shall maintain all required records for three years after final payment is made and all other pending matters are closed.

19.06 Small, Minority and Women’s Businesses

A. If Contractor intends to let any subcontracts for a portion of the work, Contractor shall take affirmative steps to assure that small, minority and women’s businesses are used when possible as sources of supplies, equipment, construction, and services. Affirmative steps shall consist of: (1) including qualified small, minority and women’s businesses on solicitation lists; (2) assuring that small, minority and women’s businesses are solicited whenever they are potential sources; (3) dividing total



requirements when economically feasible, into small tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation of small, minority, and women’s businesses; (4) establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements of the work permit, which will encourage participation by small, minority and women’s businesses; (5) using the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce; (6) requiring each party to subcontract to take the affirmative steps of this section; and (7) Contractor is encouraged to procure goods and services from labor surplus area firms.

19.07 Anti‐Kickback

A. Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti‐Kickback Act (18 USC 874 and 40 USC 276c) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 3, “Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United States”). The Act provides that Contractor or subcontractor shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. Owner shall report all suspected or reported violations to Agency.

19.08 Clean Air and Pollution Control Acts

A. If this Contract exceeds $100,000, compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857(h) and 42 USC 7401 et. seq.), section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368) and Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 USC 1251 et seq.), Executive Order 11738, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations is required. Contractor will report violations to the Agency and the Regional Office of the EPA.

19.09 State Energy Policy

A. Contractor shall comply with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (P.L. 94‐163). Mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency, contained in any applicable State Energy Conservation Plan, shall be utilized.

19.10 Equal Opportunity Requirements

A. If this Contract exceeds $10,000, Contractor shall comply with Executive Order 11246, “Equal Employment Opportunity “, as amended by Executive Order 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity”, and as supplemented by regulations at 41 CFR part 60, “Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor”.

B. Contractor’s compliance with Executive Order 11246 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative active obligations required by the Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications, as set forth in 41 CFR Part 60‐4 and its efforts to meet the goals established for the geographical area where the Contract is to be performed. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract, and in each trade, and the Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting Contractor’s goals shall be a violation of the Contract, the Executive Order, and the



regulations in 41 CFR part 60‐4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed.

C. Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the Contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number; estimated dollar amount of subcontract; and the geographical area in which the Contract is to be performed.

19.11 Restrictions on Lobbying

A. Contractor and each subcontractor shall comply with Restrictions on Lobbying (Public Law 101‐121, Section 319) as supplemented by applicable Agency regulations. This Law applies to the recipients of contracts and subcontracts that exceed $100,000 at any tier under a Federal loan that exceeds $150,000 or a Federal Grant that exceeds $100,000. If applicable, Contractor must complete a certification form on lobbying activities related to a specific Federal loan or grant that is a funding source for this Contract. Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee or any agency, a member of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant, or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Each tier shall disclose any lobbying with non‐Federal funds that takes place in connection with obtaining any Federal award. Certifications and disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the Owner.

19.12 Environmental Requirements

When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth excavations, Contractor shall comply with the following environmental conditions:

A. Wetlands – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert wetlands.

B. Floodplains – When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert 100‐year floodplain areas (Standard Flood Hazard Area) delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management agency Floodplain Maps, or other appropriate maps, e.g., alluvial soils on NRCS Soil Survey Maps.

C. Historic Preservation – Any excavation by Contractor that uncovers an historical or archaeological artifact or human remains shall be immediately reported to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by Agency after consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer.

D. Endangered Species – Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to the attention of the Contractor, Contractor will immediately report this evidence to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and



further directions issued by Agency after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service.

E. Mitigation Measures – The following environmental mitigation measures are required on this Project:

NONE.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

01 31 191 Project Meetings

PROJECT MEETINGS

A. GENERAL

1. Description

The work covered in this section includes attendance and participation in one preconstruction conference and monthly project progress meetings.

The purpose of the preconstruction conference is to enable all of the parties having an interest in this project to meet, exchange preliminary ideas and schedules, and lay the groundwork for the project.

The monthly project progress meetings shall be conducted by the Engineer to enable orderly review of progress during construction and to provide for systematic discussion of problems.

These monthly progress meetings will be held at the job site, or at a location and time schedule mutually acceptable to the Contractor, Engineer, and other involved parties.

2. Quality Control

Persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in project meetings shall have all required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions as agreed upon in the project meetings.

3. Submittals

a. Agenda Items

To the maximum extent possible, advise the Engineer, at least 24 hours in advance of the project meeting, regarding all items to be added to the agenda.

b. Minutes

The Engineer will compile minutes of each project meeting and will distribute copies to the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such other copies as he wishes.

01 31 192 Project Meetings

B. EXECUTION

1. Meeting Schedule

Coordinate with Engineer to establish a mutually acceptable schedule for project meetings.

2. Meeting Location

If possible, project meetings will be held at the job site; otherwise, location will be worked out with the Engineer.

3. Attendance

The Contractor shall have a representative present at the preconstruction conference and all monthly project meetings, unless previous arrangements are approved by the Engineer.

To the maximum extent practicable, the Contractor shall assign the same person or persons to represent his interest at all project meetings throughout the construction period. Subcontractors, suppliers, and others may be invited to attend project meetings in which their aspects of the work are involved.

01 33 00- 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals.

C. File Transfer Protocol FTP: Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from

another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format PDF: An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITIALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule within 15 days of the notice to proceed. Submit all submittals requiring action within 45 days of the notice to proceed. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 30 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action, informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval but not less than 2 weeks

in duration. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing.


h. Scheduled dates for installation. i. Activity or event number.

1.3 DIGITAL DATA FILES

A Electronic copies of CAD Drawings will be provided for Contractor's use in preparing shop

drawing submittals at a cost of $100.00 for each drawing requested, payable directly to the Engineer. 1. Upon receipt of payment for the electronic files, the drawings will be bound and purged of

all legal and proprietary information not relevant to the Contractor's requested use. a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

AutoCAD 2008. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement

form acceptable to and provided by the Engineer. 2. Each drawing will include the following Electronic Media Disclaimer:

B. Although Greenwood Engineering, transmits this electronic media for your assistance, it re-

mains the sole property of Greenwood Engineering. Greenwood Engineering reserves the right to modify or reclaim this information at our discretion. The Recipient assumes responsibility for use of this electronic media and for coordination of any updated or additional information and/or data. Greenwood Engineering is not responsible to the Recipient or any other Users allowed to use this electronic media by the Recipient for compatibility with the Recipient's hardware and/or software. The Recipient shall scan this electronic media for virus contamination prior to its use.

C. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this electronic media, or any portion thereof, may

result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.

D. By using the data contained in this electronic file, the Recipient indicates that this Electronic

Media Disclaimer has been read and agrees to the above terms and conditions for the use of this electronic media. 1. The requested electronic files may or may not in-corporate all changes to the Contract

Documents that have been issued as an addendum, bulletins, change orders, clarifications, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for including all such changes not incorporated in the electronic files.

2. Contractor shall verify that the requested electronic files are identical to the Contract Documents less items issued as an addendum or change order. If discrepancies are found between the electronic files and the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately so that the electronic files can be corrected or updated and forwarded to the Contractor.

3. If there are no discrepancies between the electronic files and the Contractor's Contract Documents less the items indicated above, the Contractor shall provide a letter to the Engineer indicating that the electronic files are acceptable.

4. If the Contractor does not notify the Engineer within 7 days after receipt of the files as to whether or not the files are acceptable, the Engineer will assume that the files have been accepted by the Contractor and any request for additional files after this period of time will be considered as separate purchase request.

5. The Contractor will hold harmless the Engineer against all damages, liabilities or costs, including legal fees and defense costs, arising from the use of these electronic files.

6. The Engineer is the sole interpreter of these electronic files. By using the electronic files, the Contractor is not relieved of the duty to fully comply with the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, the need to check, confirm, and coordinate the Contractor's


Work with that of other Contractors for the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

C. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Contract Number or identification. d. Name of Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. Submittal

number shall use a Contract Identifier, Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number e.g., GC-061000.01. Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point e.g., GC- 061000.01.A.

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. I. Locations where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

D. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal

file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling

navigation to each item.


2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier, Contract identifier and Specification Section

number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number e.g., LCEC- HVAC-061000.01. Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point e.g., LCEC-HVAC-061000.01.A.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer.

4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer.

d. Name and Number of Contract. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Name of subcontractor. h. Name of supplier. i. Name of manufacturer. j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Locations where product is to be installed as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Other necessary identification.

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Engineer on the cover sheet.

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Paper Copies: 1. Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Engineer observes

noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

2. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Engineer.

H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Engineer will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use form as provided by the Engineer. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination To. d. Source From. e. Contract Identifier. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Indication of full or partial submittal. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.


I. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. m. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. n. Remarks. o. Signature of transmitter.

3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action

stamp.

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from

Engineer’s action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit files for Action and informational via email as PDF electronic files. Engineer, will

return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. Print and provide one record copy to field office at the site for reference.

2. Alternate submission of Action Submittals: If the contractor does not have electronic transmission capabilities, submit paper copies of each submittal. Engineer, will return two annotated copies.

3. Alternate submission of Informational Submittals: If the contractor does not have electronic transmission capabilities, submit two paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will not return copies.

4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 17 00.

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications

where indicated. 6. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section

01 40 00.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

01 33 00-6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. If contractor does not have electronic file capability, submit Three paper copies of

Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return two copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data unless submittal based upon Engineer's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of Engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. If contractor does not have electronic file capability, submit two opaque bond or

vellum copies of each submittal. Engineer, will return one reviewed copy.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 33 00-7

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Engineer will retain one

Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project record sample at the project site. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product using the same nomenclature

as that found in the Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.

Engineer will return two copies.

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00.

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00.

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00.

I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Sections covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.


4. Submit subcontract list in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Number of Copies: Three paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise

indicated. Engineer will return two copies.

J. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00.

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

0. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation


of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed

either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23.

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer. Engineer will not review submittals that do not indicate the review and approval of the Contractor submitting such.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Section

01 70 00.

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp before submitting to Engineer. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, modified if necessary and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents insofar as the contractor can determine such compliance.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION

A. General: Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

evidence of appropriate review and will discard them and notify the contactor of such rejection.

B. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

discard such and notify the contractor of such action if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each acceptable submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals will not be reviewed.

E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed.

END OF SECTION

01 34 00-1 DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 34 00

DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes procedures for portions of work under this Contract that are Delegated Design (Design/Build).

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 31 00- Project Management and Coordination. 2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 3. Section 01 35 00 - Delegated Design Submittals. 4. Section 01 34 50 - Deferred Submittals. 5. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.2 DELEGATED DESIGN COMPONENTS OF WORK

A. Delegated Design (Design/Build) Components include the following:

1. Precast structural concrete. 2. Precast architectural concrete. 3. Penetration firestopping. 4. Wet pipe sprinkler systems. 5. Excavation support and protection.

1.3 DESCRIPTIONS FOR SYSTEMS LISTED IN PROJECT MANUAL

A. Refer to system descriptions in PART 1 - GENERAL and PART 2 - PRODUCTS in each technical

specification section listed for references to delegated design work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to quality assurance described in PART 1 - GENERAL in individual specification sections with delegated design work.

B. Quality assurance described in specifications shall be minimum acceptable standards for this

project.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Refer to submittals in PART 1 - GENERAL, in each specification section with delegated design work.

1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors complete responsibility for design, contract

documents, calculations, submittals, permits, fabrication, transportation and installation.

B. Submit and coordinate delegated design documents to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for separate permits.

C. Fill out Delegated Design Summary sheet.


D. Design/Build components of Work are defined as complete, operational systems, provided and, installed for their intended use.

1.7 OWNER AND ENGINEER OF RECORD RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Owner's Design Professional is the Engineer of Record for the project.

1. Review by Engineer of Record of delegated design submittals is for design intent only and does not reduce or shift responsibility from Contractor or assigned subcontractor, to Owner or Owner's Design Professional.

2. The Owner is not responsible the costs for any delay, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by Contractor or Subcontractor to coordinate their work with work of other trades on project or to provide delegated design portion or component in a timely manner to meet the project schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


DELEGATED DESIGN SUMMARY SHEET

CONTRACTOR INFORMATION: SHEET OF

Name: ------------------------------------------------ Phone: ---------------------

Contact Person: ----------------------------------------- Fax: Address: --------------------------------------------- email: ------------------------

PROJECT INFORMATION:

Address: -----------------------------------------

PLAN CHECK INFORMATION:

GE: ---------------------------------------- Phone: ---------------------

Contact Person: ---------------------------------------- Fax: -----------------------

Address: ------------------------------------------ email: -----------------------

.


NO,

SPECIFICATION SECTION NO. & TITLE

1. ITEM 2. ENGINEER 3. PHONE# 4. EMAIL

SUBMITTAL DATE TO Engineer

REMARKS

1

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

2

1. ___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4.

3

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

4

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4.

5

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________

6

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

7

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

01 34 DO-5 DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

NO,

SPECIFICATION SECTION NO. & TITLE

1. ITEM 2. ENGINEER 3. PHONE# 4. EMAIL

SUBMITTAL DATE TO AHJ

REMARKS

8

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________

9

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________

10

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

11

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________ 4. ___________________________________________

-

12

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

13

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

14

1.___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________

4. ___________________________________________

SECTION 01 34 50

DEFERRED SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for Deferred Submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 01 34 00- Delegated Design Requirements. 2. Division 02 to 49 Sections.

1.2 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS

A. Provide name of manufacturer and name of engineer registered in the state of project, who will seal

calculations and submittals for following delegated design systems. Insert this information on permit documents submitted to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Submit drawings, materials, specifications, and calculations meeting specified requirements to

Engineer for review of conformance to design intent only.

C. Engineer will return copies of documents to Contractor for submittal to AHJ for final approval or separate permits.

D. Delegated design systems requiring deferred submittals include:

1. Precast structural concrete. 2. Precast architectural concrete. 3. Penetration firestopping. 4. Wet pipe sprinkler systems. 5. Excavation support and protection.

PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)


END OF SECTION

01 34 50- 1 DEFERRED SUBMITTALS

01 35 00- 1 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 35 00

DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The intent of Delegated Design Submittals required by this section is to account for professional engineering responsibility for design, review and acceptance of components of Work forming a part of permanent Work in accordance with the Building Code, and that has been assigned to a design entity other than Engineer of Record including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Design requiring structural analysis of load bearing components and connections. 2. Design requiring compliance with fire safety regulations. 3. Design requiring compliance with life or health safety regulations. 4. Delegated Design Submittals are not required for components of Work requiring engineering

for temporary work including, but not limited to, crane hoisting, engineered lifts, false Work, shoring, and concrete formwork that would normally form a part of Contractor's methods and means of construction.

5. The requirements of this section do not reduce the responsibilities of the Engineer's role as Professional of Record; submittals will be used by Engineer to establish that Work is substantially performed in accordance with the Building Code and project requirements.

6. Delegated design elements in Contract Documents are shown for design intent.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete 2. Section 03 45 00 - Precast Architectural Concrete 3. Section 21 13 13- Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems

1.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. The Delegated Design Entity responsible for design will provide, coordinate and install Design/Build

Components.

B. Design Delegated Design Elements attached to structural frame or supplemental to structural frame for anticipated loads outlined on structural drawings or found in the Building Code.

C. Coordinate Delegated Design Elements with appropriate subcontractors.

D. Clearly define load reactions at interface between Delegated Design Elements and structural frame

to allow for a review by Engineer of Record.

1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents.

B. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written

request for additional information to Engineer.

C. Delegated design will be required for elements designed by a specialty professional, which may include, but are not limited to: 1. Elements normally fabricated off site.

01 35 00-2 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITIALS

2. Elements that require specialized fabrication equipment or a proprietary fabrication process not usually available at job site (i.e.: open web steel joists, wood trusses, combination wood and metal or plywood joists, prefabricated wood or metal buildings, noise and vibration isolation devices, elevators).

3. Elements requiring civil engineering, not normally a part of scope of services performed by Architectural; structural; mechanical; electrical; or geotechnical disciplines.

1.4 ENGINEER OF RECORD RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Engineer will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the

limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria

specified in the Contract

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES

A. Where Architect or Engineer design services or certifications by a design Architect or Engineer are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

B. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written

request for additional information to Engineer.

C. In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file or three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design Engineer, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design Engineer.

D. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract

Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Include summary of Work described in technical specification section as a part of the required Letter of Commitment.

B. Prepare required submittals and present to Engineer within sufficient time to allow for Engineer's

detailed review and acceptance.

3.2 LETTER OF COMMITMENT

A. Submit a signed and sealed Letter of Commitment on company letterhead addressed to Engineer in accordance with format in Appendix A attached to the end of this Section prior to starting Work requiring design and seal of a professional engineer.

3.3 LETTER OF COMPLIANCE

A. Submit a signed and sealed Letter of Compliance on company letterhead addressed to Engineer in

01 35 00-3 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS

accordance with format in Appendix B attached to the end of this Section on completion of Work requiring design and seal of a professional engineer.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A LETTER OF

COMMITMENT

Submit a signed and sealed letter of commitment on company letterhead in the form as follows:

[Date]

BASCO Associates, P.C. 445 West Philadelphia Street York, PA 17401

Attention: Kelly Greenwood, PE, PS

Re: Letter of Commitment for Delegated Design of [System or Component of Work]

Charleston Safe Room South Market Street Charleston, MS

As the retained registered professional engineer for design and field review of the above named component of Work and project, I hereby give assurance I am qualified to perform the following Work as required by Contract Documents:

1. [List appropriate design services for System or Component of Work]; 2. Preparation of shop and erection documents; 3. Review fabrication of [structural] [fire rated] [life and health safety] components; 4. Review erection of [structural] [fire rated] [life and health safety] components. 5. [Modify list to suit System of Component of Work.]

I will be responsible for above noted Work as described in Section [## ## ##- Name of Section] of the Project Manual for the above referenced project, including requirements of addenda, change orders and change directives.

I will also be responsible for field review of fabrication and erection of [structural] [fire rated] [life and health safety] components as required to ascertain substantial compliance with the Building Code and Contract Documents.

I will notify you in writing if my responsibility is terminated at any time during the course of Work covered by this Letter of Commitment.

Retained Professional Engineer

Signature (Seal)


APPENDIX B LETTER OF

COMPLIANCE

Submit a signed and sealed letter of commitment on company letterhead in the form as follows:

[Date]

BASCO Associates, P.C. 445 West Philadelphia Street York, PA 17401

Attention: Kelly Greenwood, PE, PS

Re: Letter of Commitment for Delegated Design of [System or Component of Work]

Charleston Safe Room South Market Street Charleston, MS

I hereby give assurance that I have fulfilled my obligations for field review as outlined by previously submitted Letter of Commitment.

I hereby give assurance that aspects of [structural] [fire rated] [life and health safety] Work as defined by previously submitted Letter of Commitment have been completed in substantial compliance with the Contract Documents and Building Code.

Retained Professional Engineer

Signature (Seal)

1 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor’s other quality assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality assurance and control services required by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality Assurance Services: activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality Control Services: tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer.

C. Preconstruction Testing: tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: tests and inspections that are performed by a NRTL, an NVLAP, or a

testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.


E. Source Quality Control Testing: tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality Control Testing: tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: an entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

I. Experienced: when used with an entity or individual, “experienced” means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: if compliance with two or more standards is specified and the

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different but apparently equal to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor’s Quality Control Plan: for quality assurance and quality control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Contractor’s Quality Control Manager Qualifications: for supervisory personnel.


C. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility: when required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.

1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Engineer. 2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Engineer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: for testing agencies specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.

1.5 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. Quality Control Plan, General: submit quality control plan within 14 days of Notice to

Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Engineer. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor’s quality assurance and quality control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor’s construction schedule.

B. Quality Control Personnel Qualifications: engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality assurance and quality control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. Project quality control manager may also serve as Project Superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements

through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: include in quality control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:


1. Contractor performed tests and inspections including subcontractor performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the “Statement of Special Inspections”.

3. Owner performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Engineer has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility: each Contractor shall be responsible for the

construction, fabrication, or installations of a main wind force resisting system (MWFRS), doors, and windows, or any component listed in the quality assurance plan should submit a written statement of responsibility to the Engineer, the responsible registered design professional, and owner before beginning work on the system or component. The Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and installing components that are consistent with the Contract Documents and instructions provided by the manufacturer so that they provide the appropriate level of protection. The Contractor’s statement of responsibility should contain: Acknowledgement of awareness of the special criteria contained in the quality assurance plan; Acknowledgement that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the Contract Documents; Procedures for exercising control within the Contractor’s organization, and the method and frequency of reporting and distributing reports; Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the organization; Information on the installation and construction of the MWFRS; Acknowledgment of proper installation of the impact protective systems.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of the testing agency.


4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of project and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting or re-inspection.

B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative’s Field Reports: prepare written information

documenting manufacturer’s technical representative’s tests and inspections specified in other Sections, include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory Authorized Service Representative’s Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer’s factory authorized service representative’s tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory authorized service representative

making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.


C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A Professional Engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall

be performed by entities who ae recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329, and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST’s National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for the Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for the Project.

J. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,

and similar quality assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL


A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor’s responsibility. Perform quality control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality control services.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor’s responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction

when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections.

C. Manufacturer’s Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer’s technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer’s technical representative’s services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of worn materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written records.

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were

Contractor’s responsibility, provide quality control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality

control service through the Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any Duties of Contractor.


F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor’s construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. Distribute schedule to Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special

inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as indicated in individual Specification Sections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.


B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Engineer’s reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged

construction and restore substrates and finishes.

B. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of Specification.

C. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities.

D. Repair and protection are Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality control services.

END OF SECTION

01 42 00- 1 REFERENCES

SECTION 01 42 00

REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms inc lud ing

“requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by g r a p h i c r e p r e se n t a t i o n s or i n wr i t ten

form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

D. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies

directly from publication source.

01 42 00-2 REFERENCES

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org

(703) 358-2960

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com

(216) 241-7333

AABC Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com

(202) 737-0202

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org

(847) 303-5664

AASHTO American A s s o c i a t i o n o f S t a t e H i g h w a y (202) 624-5800 and T r a n s p o r t a t i o n Officials www.transportation.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists www.aatcc.org

(919) 549-8141

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America www.airbarrier.org

(866) 956-5888

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org

(202) 367-1155

ACI American Concrete Institute www.concrete.org

(248) 848-3700

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org

(972) 506-7216

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org

(205) 257-2530

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org

AGA American Gas Association

www.aga.org

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org

(800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 (202) 824-7000

(703) 548-3118

014200-3 REFERENCES

AHA

American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)

AHAM

Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org

(202) 872-5955

AI

Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org

(859) 288-4960

AlA

American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org

(800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300

AISC

American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org

(800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400

AISI

American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org

(202) 452-7100

AlTC

American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org

(303) 792-9559

ALCA

Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)

ALSC

American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org

(301) 972-1700

AMCA

Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org

(847) 394-0150

ANSI

American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org

(202) 293-8020

AOSA

Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. www.aosaseed.com

(405) 780-7372

APA

Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org

(239) 454-6989

APA

APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org

(253) 565-6600

APAEWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)

API American Petroleum Institute www.api.org

(202) 682-8000

ARI

Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org

(703) 524-8800

ARMA

Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org

(202) 207-0917

014200-4 REFERENCES

ASCE

ASCE/SEI

American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org American Society o f C i v i l E n g i n e e r s /Structural Engineering Institute (SeeASCE)

(800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800) 527-4723 Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400

ASME

ASSE

ASTM

AWCI

AWCMA

AWl

AWPA

AWS

AWWA

BHMA

BIA

BICSI

BIFMA

ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry www.awci.org American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (NowWCMA) Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com American Welding Society www.aws.org American Water Works Association www.awwa.org Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org BICSI, Inc. www.bicsi.org BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com

(800) 843-2763 (973) 882-1170 (440) 835-3040

(610) 832-9500

(703) 534-8300

(571) 323-3636

(205) 733-4077

(800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 (800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711 (212) 297-2122

(703) 620-0010

(800) 242-7405 (813) 979-1991 (616) 285-3963

014200-5 REFERENCES

BISSC

Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.org

(866) 342-4772

BWF

Badminton World Federation (Formerly: IBF- International Badminton Federation) www.internationalbadminton.org

6-03-9283 7155

CCC

Carpet Cushion Council www.carpetcushion.org

(610) 527-3880

CDA

Copper Development Association www.copper.org

(800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200

CEA

Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca

(613) 230-9263

CEA

Consumer Electronics Association www.ce.org

(866) 858-1555 (703) 907-7600

CFFA

Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com

(216) 241-7333

CGA

Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com

(703) 788-2700

CIMA

Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org

(888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462

CISCA

Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org

(630) 584-1919

CISPI

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org

(423) 892-0137

CLFMI

Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org

(301) 596-2583

CRRC

Cool Roof Rating Council www.coolroofs.org

(866) 465-2523 (510) 485-7175

CPA

Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com

(301) 670-0604

CPPA

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org

(800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607

CRI

Carpet and Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com

(800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176

CRSI

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org

(847) 517-1200

CSA

Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000

014200-6 REFERENCES

CSA

CSA International (Formerly: lAS- International Approval Services)

(866) 797-4272 (416) 747-4000

www.csa-international.org

CSI

Cast Stone Institute www.caststone.org

(717) 272-3744

CSI

Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org

(800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300

CSSB

Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org

(604) 820-7700

CTI

Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org

(281) 583-4087

DHI

Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org

(703) 222-2010

EIA

Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org

(703) 907-7500

EIMA

EIFS Industry Members Association www.eima.com

(800) 294-3462 (770) 968-7945

EJCDC

Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee www.ejdc.org

(703) 295-5000

EJMA

Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org

(914) 332-0040

ESD

ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org

(315) 339-6937

ETL SEMCO

lntertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS- lntertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com

(800) 967-5352

FIBA

Federation lnternationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com

41 22 545 00 00

FIVB

Federation lnternationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch

41 21 345 35 35

FM Approvals

FM Approvals LLC www.fmglobal.com

(781) 762-4300

FM Global

FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com

(401) 275-3000

014200-7 REFERENCES

FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global)

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772

Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com

FSA Fluid Sealing Association www.fluidsealing.com

(610) 971-4850

FSC Forest Stewardship Council www.fsc.org

49 228 367 66 0

GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org

(202) 289-5440

GANA Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com

(785) 271-0208

GRI (Part of GSI)

GS Green Seal www.greenseal.org

(202) 872-6400

GSI Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org

(610) 522-8440

HI Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org

(973) 267-9700

HI Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org

(908) 464-8200

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org

(703) 435-2900

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com

(410) 838-6550

lAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International)

IBF International Badminton Federation

(Now BWF)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net

(770) 830-0369

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org

(847) 827-0830

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11

014200-8 REFERENCES

IEEE

www.iec.ch

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)

(212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org

IESNA

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org

(212) 248-5000

lEST

Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology www.iest.org

(847) 255-1561

IGCC

Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org

(315) 646-2234

IGMA

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org

(613) 233-1510

Ill

Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com

(812) 275-4426

ISO

International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch

41227490111

Available from ANSI www.ansi.org

(202) 293-8020

ISSFA

International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net

(877) 464-7732 (702) 567-8150

ITS

lntertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO)

ITU

International Telecommunication Union www.itu.inUhome

41 22 730 5111

KCMA

Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org

(703) 264-1690

LMA

Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)

LPI

Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org

(800) 488-6864

MBMA

Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com

(216) 241-7333

MFMA

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.maplefloor.org

(888) 480-9138

MFMA

Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.metalframingmfg.org

(312) 644-6610

MH

Material Handling (Now MHIA)

014200-9 REFERENCES

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222

www.marble-institute.com

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703) 281-6613

Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591

www.naamm.org

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926

www.nadca.com

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext. 453

www.aahperd.org/nagws/

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848

www.nbgqa.com

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900

www.ncma.org

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-2300

www.ncta.com

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110

www.necanet.org

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org

014200-10 REFERENCES

NEMA

National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org

(703) 841-3200

NETA

InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org

(888) 300-6382 (269) 488-6382

NFHS

National Federation of State High School Associations

(317) 972-6900

www.nfhs.org

NFPA

NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

(800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000

www.nfpa.org

NFRC

National Fenestration Rating Council

(301) 589-1776

www.nfrc.org

NGA

National Glass Association

(866) 342-5642

www.glass.org (703) 442-4890

NHLA

National Hardwood Lumber Association

(800) 933-0318

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818

NLGA

National Lumber Grades Authority

(604) 524-2393

www.nlga.org

NOFMA

NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association

(901) 526-5016

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com

NOMMA

National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association

(888) 516-8585

www.nomma.org

NRCA

National Roofing Contractors Association

(800) 323-9545

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

NRMCA

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

(888) 846-7622

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NSF

NSF International

(800) 673-6275

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010

www.nsf.org

NSSGA

National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association

(800) 342-1415

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788

NTMA

National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)

(800) 323-9736

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930

NTRMA

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association

(NowTRI)

NWWDA

National Wood Window and Door Association

(NowWDMA)

OPL

Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.

014200-11 REFERENCES

PCI

PDCA

PDI

PGI

PrecasUPrestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org PVC Geomembrane Institute http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu

(312) 786-0300 (800) 332-7322 (314) 514-7322 (800) 589-8956 (978) 557-0720 (217) 333-3929

PLANET

PTI

Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated

America) www.landcarenetwork.org Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org

(800) 395-2522 Landscape Contractors of (703) 736-9666

(602) 870-7540

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org

RFCI

RIS

SAE

SDI

SDI

SEFA

SEI/ASCE

SGCC

SIA

SIGMA

Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com Redwood Inspection Service www.redwoodinspection.com SAE International www.sae.org Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers (See ASCE) Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)

(301) 340-8580 (888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662 (877) 606-7323 (724) 776-4841 (847) 458-4647

(440) 899-0010

(877) 294-5424 (516) 294-5424

(315) 646-2234

(866) 817-8888 (703) 683-2075


SJI Steel Joist Institute

www.steeljoist.org (843) 626-1995

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org

(561) 533-0991

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org

(703) 803-2980

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers www.smpte.org

(914) 761-1100

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD- The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.;

Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org

(800) 523-6154

SPIB Southem Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org

(850) 434-2611

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry www.spri.org

(781) 647-7026

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

www.sspc.org

STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com

SWI Steel Window Institute

www.steelwindows.com

(800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630 (877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331 (847) 438-8265 (216) 241-7333

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org

(816) 472-7974

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (NowTCNA)

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. www.tileusa.com

(864) 646-8453

TIAIEIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries (703) 907-7700 Alliance

www.tiaonline.org

TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org

(303) 939-9700

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. www.tpinst.org

(703) 683-1010


TPI

TRI

UL

UNI

USAV

USGBC

USITT

WASTEC

WCLIB

WCMA

wcsc

Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org Tile Roofing Institute www.tileroofing.org Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org USA Volleyball www.usavolleyball.org U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.usitt.org Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org Window Covering Manufacturers Association www.wcmanet.org Window Covering Safety Council

(800) 405-8873 (847) 649-5555 (312) 670-4177 (877) 854-3577 (847) 272-8800 (972) 243-3902 (888) 786-5539 (719) 228-6800 (800) 795-1747 (800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463 (800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700 (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651 (212) 297-2122 (800) 506-4636

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Association)

www.windowcoverings.org

Covering Manufacturers (212) 297-2109

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood

AssoCiation) www.wdma.com

(800) 223-2301 Window and Door (847) 299-5200

WI

WIC

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of (916) 372-9943 California)

www.wicnet.org Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI)

WMMPA

WSRCA

WWPA

Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com Western States Roofing Contractors Association www.wsrca.com Western Wood Products Association

(800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591 (800) 725-0333 (650) 570-5441 (503) 224-3930


C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org

(909) 472-4100

ICC International Code Council www.iccsafe.org

(888) 422-7233

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org

(800) 423-6587 (562) 699-0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, te lephone n u m b e r s , and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil

(202) 761-0011

CPSC

Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov

(800) 638-2772 (301) 504-7923

DOC

Department of Commerce www.commerce.gov

(202) 482-2000

DOD

Department of Defense http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil

(215) 697-6257

DOE

Department of Energy www.energy.gov

(202) 586-9220

EPA

Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov

(202) 272-0167

FAA

Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov

(866) 835-5322

FCC

Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov

(888) 225-5322

FDA

Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov

(888) 463-6332

GSA

General Services Administration www.gsa.gov

(800) 488-3111

HUD

Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov

(202) 708-1112

LBL

Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000


NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)

NIST

OSHA

National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov

(301) 975-6478 (800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA)

PHS

RUS

so

TRB

USDA

USPS

Office of Public Health and Science www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) State Department www.state.gov Transportation Research Board http://gulliver.trb.org Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov Postal Service www.usps.com

(202) 690-7694

(202) 720-9540

(202) 647-4000

(202) 334-2934

(202) 720-2791

(202) 268-2000

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG

CFR

DOD

DSCC

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)

(800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080

(866) 512-1800 (202) 512-1800 (215) 697-2664


FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)

FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

(215) 697-2664

Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil

Available from General Services Administration www.gsa.gov

(202) 619-8925

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.wbdg.org/ccb

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

(202) 289-7800

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

(215) 697-2664

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov

(800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080



END OF SECTION

01 50 00‐1 Temporary Facilities & Controls

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES ANDCONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Owner Engineer, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water, Sewer, and Electrical Service from Existing System: When applicable, utility services from Owner’s existing utility system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions for services as required for construction operations.

1.3 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of MDEQ Small Projects General Permit.

C. Fire Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of MFPA-241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.

D. Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption and damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water damaged materials, protocols for mitigating

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water and describe plans for dealing with water

from operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

E. Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust control and HVAC control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation.

F. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:


1. Locations of dust control partitions at each phase of the Work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust control measures. 5. Waste management plan.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner’s acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch, 0.148 inch thick, galvanized steel, chain link fabric

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch OD line posts and 2-7/8 inch OD corner and pull posts with 1-5/8 inch OD top rails. All perimeter fencing shall have a mesh barrier screen 6 feet high.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire resistive sheet, 10 mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C. Dust Control Adhesive Surface Walk off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 x 60 inches. D. Insulation: Un-faced mineral fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock

wool; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: At each Contractors option, prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Engineer, Commissioning Authority, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project site documents, including file cabinets, plan tables, plan

racks, and bookcases.


2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electric power service and 120 V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4 foot square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking Water. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 degrees F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 25 fc desk height.

2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide

vented, self-contained, liquid propone gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, open flame heaters, or salamander type heating

units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00.

C. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter equipped portable units with four stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum

interference with performance of the Work. B. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. C. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00. D. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until

facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Install temporary service or connect to existing service.


B. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

C. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. D. Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. E. Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction

personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Use of Owner’s toilet facilities will not be permitted. G. Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or

drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. DO NOT use owner’s permanent systems.

H. Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

I. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

J. Connect to Owner’s electric power service. Maintain equipment in condition acceptable to Owner.

K. Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install (one) telephone line for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers:

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor’s home office. d. Contractor’s emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Engineer’s office. f. Owner’s office. g. Principal subcontractors’ field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Maintain temporary and support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove within 24 hours after Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after


Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads as indicated on Drawings.

C. Provide dust control treatment that is non-polluting and non-tracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

D. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to Section 31 20 00. 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot mix asphalt pavement until

immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot mix asphalt pavement base course before installation of final course according to Section 32 12 16.

E. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for firefighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

F. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel within areas designated as permanent parking within Contract Documents.

G. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

H. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking

entrance to Project. 3. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 4. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19. Provide waste collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Section 01 73 00 for progress cleaning requirements.

J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities.


K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00.

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of MDEQ Small Projects General Permit Best Management Practices and the Engineer’s SWPPP.

D. Storm Water Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Security Fence: Before constructions operations begin, furnish and install temporary site barrier to prevent vehicular traffic from entering site construction area except via entrance gates. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

H. Temporary Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed,

from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior.

2. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.


2. Supervise welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and –protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor’s Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows. 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with

high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. If approved by Owner use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum

based products that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings over a forty-eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Engineer.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL


A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project Identification Sign Lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Compete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt, or other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00.

END OF SECTION

01 60 00‐1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken

from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model

number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products” Article. 2. Engineer’s A c t i o n : If n e c e s s a r y , Engineer w i l l r e q u e s t a d d i t i o n a l

i n fo rma t ion o r documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.


a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each c o n t r a c t o r i s r e s p o n s i b l e f o r p r o v i d i n g p r o d u c t s a n d

c o n s t r u c t i o n m e t h o d s compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to m1mm1ze long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply w i t h product man u f ac tu r e r ’ s written in s t ruc t ions f o r temperature,

humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.


7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written d o c u m e n t t h a t con ta in s appropr ia te t e r ms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer t o Divisions 02 through 49. Sections f o r specific co n t en t requirements and

particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 70 00.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named


product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products o r substitutions f o r Contractor’s convenience will not b e considered.

3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered in conformance with the contract requirements.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered in conformance with the contract requirements.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specif ica t ions indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification:

1. Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

2. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection S p e c i f i c a t i o n : Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected by

Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS


A. Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor’s request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names

and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.


END OF SECTION

01 73 00‐1 EXECUTION

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work.

1.2

A.

B.

1.3

A.

B.

C.

DEFINITIONS Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include

changes to structural e l e m e n t s a n d operating c o m p o n e n t s a s w e l l as c h a n g e s i n building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems

that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services and systems will be disrupted.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.



A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of Construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Engineer of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Engineer before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Electrical wiring systems.

2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, air or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Equipment supports. e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties

involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's

written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.


C. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to the Engineer for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and loca t ion of underground and other ut il i t ies and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with instal lat ion only after unsatisfactory cond i t ions have been cor rec ted . Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.


D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Section 01 31 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment

and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations fo r installing

products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations

or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check S h o p Drawings of other work to confirm tha t adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of

adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components

at heights directed by Engineer. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not

indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not

considered hazardous.


3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

B. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

C. Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection

from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

F. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical

integrity of installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained

adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

5. Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.


6. Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

G. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's

construction personnel. 1. Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the

Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Include Owner's construction personnel at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.

Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 90 degrees F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked.

B. Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution

of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Keep installed work clean. Clean instal led surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.


H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in

progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in

Section 01 91 13.

B. Start equipment and operating components t o confirm proper operation. malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00.

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION

017419-1 CONSTRUCTION WASTEMANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B.

1.3

A.

1.4

A.

1.5

A.

1.6

A.

B.

Disposal: Removal off-site of d e m o l i t i o n and construction waste and s u b s e q u e n t sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ACTION SUBMITTALS Submit waste management plan within 15 days of date established for the notice to proceed.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

Indicate anticipated t y p e s and quantities of site-clearing a n d construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. List each type of waste and whether it will be recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Recycled Mater ia ls : Include list of local receivers and processors a n d type of

recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed M a t e r i a l s : Indicate h o w and where mater i a l s wi l l be disposed o f .

Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating

recyclable waste including sizes o f c o n t a i n e r s , container labeling, and d e s i g n a t e d location on Project site where materials separation will be located.


017419-2 CONSTRUCTION WASTEMANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Comply with Section 01 50 00 for operation, termination, and removal requirements.

C. Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as

appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal

return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that

are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and

noise control.

3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

B. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

C. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas.

D. Do not burn waste materials.

END OF SECTION

01 77 00-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the

following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

C. Request reinspections when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is

completed or corrected.


D. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings if required.

B. Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

C. Request reinspections when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is

completed or corrected.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect, will return two copies.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11 inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark


tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local

laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.


k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

m. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

n. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

o. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

p. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

q. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

r. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection.

s. Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report upon completion of cleaning.

t. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

u. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 77 00.

END OF SECTION

01 78 23-1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 6. List of make and model for maintenance product, including filters, motor belts, washers,

and other replacement components.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to

be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

B. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications

and field conditions.

C. Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose

title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Engineer will return two copies.

D. Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

E. Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and

at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer will return copy with comments.

F. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's and comments. Submit copies of

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to


commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment and replacement and maintenance parts. 4. Table of contents.

B. List systems and subsystems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance

manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each

system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and

subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Include the following information on the title page:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Engineer. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. List each product included in manual in the table of contents, identified by product name,

indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

D. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate

data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

E. Organize manual contents into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,


equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

F. Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.

G. Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

1.6 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and

procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak.


B. Incl 1.

de the following descriptions: Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

2.

Documents. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Incl de the following operating procedures, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and

signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Include the following emergency procedures, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.7 OPERATION MANUALS

A. In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

u

u


D. Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

1.8 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source

information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match

manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Include the following product information, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Include manufacturer's written maintenance procedures recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Include lists of repair materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would

affect validity of warranties or bonds.

G. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product

name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each

component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly


and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Include the following maintenance procedures information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and

separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

I. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 2 -EXECUTION

2.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency

personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and

maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an

instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component


incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

F. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where

the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

G. Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39.

H. Comply with Section 01 77 00 for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance

documentation.

END OF SECTION

01 78 39- 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Submit three sets of marked-up record prints.

B. Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract

modifications.

C. Submit one paper copy or disc containing annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each product data submittal.

D. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit

duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

E. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy or electronic media disc containing annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

F. Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated in Project record documents

concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

01 78 39-2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

2. Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders. I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind

each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each

sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification as follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Engineer. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that

indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where

applicable.

01 78 39-3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

B. Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy.

C. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or paper copy.

C. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number

and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents

used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION

01 79 00- 1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training

modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

B. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced demonstration and training

video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

C. Qualification Data: For facilitator or instructor.

D. For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

E. For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of

performance-based test.


A. Submit two DVD copies within 10 days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared on 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, three- ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

01 79 00-2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 40 00 experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing

demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,

and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for

each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include

a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals.


d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with


requirements in Section 01 78 23.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. Schedule training with Owner with at least 15 days' advance notice.

D. At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of

module by use of a written or demonstration performance-based test.

E. Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

B. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and

lesson outline.

C. Provide high quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect.

D. Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of

demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

E. Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape

opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.

END OF SECTION

03 30 00 1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings:

1. Prepared by or under the superv1s1on of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

2. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Professional.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency. G.

Welding certificates.

H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds.

03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Semi-rigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials.

I. Material Test Reports: For aggregates, include service record data indicating absence of

deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

J . Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified

tolerances.

K. Minutes of pre-installation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

2. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Quality Control Testing Services: Refer to Section 01 40 00, Quality Control Testing Services. D.

Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services: Refer to Section 01 40 10, Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the

same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS 01.4/D 1.4M,

"Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel."

G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

H. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent.


b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: 1. Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and

medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or

adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed

concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in

concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or

waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.


C. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends

square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and for concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C.

Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C. Include manufacturer's recommended

adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one


of the following: 1. Insulation Solutions Inc.; ViperVaporCheck II. 2. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 6. 3. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65. 4. Stege Industries, LLC; Stege Wrap, 10 mil Class C.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to

fresh concrete. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. 3. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D.

Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M CureR. 4. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Kure 1315. 2. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus.

2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic

silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densities concrete surfaces. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. 2. Conspec by Dayton Superior; lntraseal. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17). 4. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A


shore durometer hardness of 80 aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as

defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by

topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

E. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS


A. Footings and Piers: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-

range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls Including CMU Filled Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-

range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 inch nominal

maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days:

a. Interior Slabs: 3500 psi. b. Exterior Slabs: 4500 psi.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd.. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: For trowel finished floors do not exceed 3 percent. 5. All exterior slabs are to be air entrained.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Reaction and Support Blocking:

1. 28-day compressive strength: 2000 psi 2. Slump: 2 to 6 inches 3. Air content: 5 percent plus or minus 1 percent 4. Concrete may be from a mobile cement concrete plant or truck-mixed.

B. Concrete Splash Blocks: Reinforced precast concrete splash blocks formed of 4000 psi

concrete with air entrained concrete.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

B. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours

to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust stained steel form facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is

inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and


Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots and embedded angles in concrete structures as indicated. 4. Install embedded angles as indicated on the Drawings.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not

support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening

or disturbing shores.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Professional.

3.4

A.

B.

3.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

VAPOR RETARDERS Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.


3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Professional. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near

corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 25 percent of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or

asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is

complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Professional.


C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled m1xmg water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view and to receive rubbed finish.


C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one- half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or

power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces of floor slab. 2. Finish surfaces to the F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of

flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as

indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Professional before application.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place

unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is stilt green


and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,

and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: a. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

b. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.


4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and

complete surface repairs. 2. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic

has permanently ceased.

C. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joint clean and dry.

D. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Professional.

Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Professional's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Professional.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and


verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Professional's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Professional's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION

03 35 00-1 CONCRETE FINISHING

SECTION 03 35 00

CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

1.3

A.

B.

1.4

A.

B.

C.

D.

1.5

A. 1.6

A.

SUMMARY Section includes liquid floor treatments for interior exposed concrete floors.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product. Include technical specifications and installation requirements. Samples: 12 inch square sample of material on concrete surface.


Material test reports.

Product test reports.

Research reports.

Sample warranty.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Mockups for Interior Concrete Floor Treatment: Cast mockup of full size section of concrete, 48 inches square, to replicate joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship of the existing untreated concrete. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size as directed by the Engineer. 2. Apply concrete sealer to half of mockup to demonstrate quality of workmanship for the in-

place application. 3. Obtain the Engineer's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approval mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging the completed Work. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with installation when weather conditions are in compliance with

manufacturer's recommended limitations.

03 35 00-2 CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT (POL)

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Advanced Floor Products; Retro-Piate 99. 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus. 3. Ques Mark; Diamond Quest Densifying Impregnator Application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

A.

PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation of substrates to receive floor sealer. Clean all floor surfaces; remove surface dust, dirt, and contamination to ensure concrete slab to be sealed is restored to original condition.

Concrete floors shall be free of stains and dirt prior to application of the liquid floor treatment.

Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive floor sealer and close off floor drains, to prevent spillage and migration of liquid materials outside floor sealer area. LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup. 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and

according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats.

3. Continue polishing with progressively finer grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level to match approved mockup.

4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. 5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide protections to ensure that work will not be damage or deteriorated at time of final

acceptance.

END OF SECTION

04 22 00-1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.2

A.

B.

1.3

A.

B.

C.

DEFINITIONS CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of

exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 2. Accessories embedded in the masonry.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. Include test results, measurements, and calculations

establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include

description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. Include test data, measurements, and calculations

establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,

brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-area

compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

4. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 5. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.


6. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.

F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirement


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture

and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform

quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the

time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do

not . use cementitious materials that have become damp.

D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

E. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting

and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

F. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of

dirt and oil.



A. During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at

end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

B. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

C. Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or

painted.

Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings

spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 I ASCE 6 I TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

2. Prior to the building being enclosed by walls, if the outside temperature shall fall below 32 degrees F at any time during the day or night, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a temporary enclosure to maintain a temperature of 40 degrees F throughout the entire work area; heat both sides of walls under construction. Maintain 40 degrees F. within the enclosure for minimum 48 hours after construction.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements:

1. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.

2. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-

resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.


B. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. ACM Chemistries; RainBioc. 2. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.- Conn.; Dry-Block.

C. CMU’s: ASTM C 90: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal Weight. 3. Size(Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs

with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type Ill may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing

no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Masonry Cement. 2. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement. 3. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. 2. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.- Conn.; Morset. 3. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with

CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

I. Water: Potable.


2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148 inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148 inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single

pair of side rods.

2.6 TIESANDANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached

to tie section; formed from 0.105 inch thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face,

made from 0.25 inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire

C. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1 1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2. EaCo Chem, Inc. 3. ProSoCo, Inc.


2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use masonry cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Property Specification. Provide

the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping

connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.


C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or

minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.


3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less

than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and

similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above. 2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,

or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint


thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.7

A.

B.

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. CONTROL JOINTS General: Install control materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.

Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00, but not less than 3/8 inch. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.8

A.

B.

C.

3.9

A.

B.

LINTELS Install steel lintels where indicated. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout


placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches .


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Professional's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.


4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion

of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other

masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Agency's property.

END OF SECTION

05 50 00- 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Metal ships' ladders. 5. Metal bollards.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include Anchor bolts, steel pipe

sleeves, and inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry where anchor bolts, sleeves, and inserts are not specified in other Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturers and professional engineer specified in "Quality

Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide lists of completed projects similar to this project and include project names and addresses, and names and addresses of Engineers and Owners.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. All welders shall be certified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. A manufacturer complying with applicable standard specifications. 2. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for

designing products indicated to comply with design loads and with performance requirements.

05 50 00-2 METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including bearing plates, leveling plates, sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are

specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

professional engineer licensed in the State of Mississippi, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F 6, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.4 FERROUS METALS

A. Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992.

B. Steel Plates, C and S Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.


C.

D.

E.

2.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. FASTENERS Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: 1. Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load

imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to

comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying

with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.

K. Epoxy Anchors: As specified on Structural Drawings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded, E70XX minimum electrode.


B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer, with a VOC content of 3.5 lb/gal. or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), or equal as approved by the Engineer.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.


J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 inch embedment and 2 inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C.

D.

2.9

A.

B.

2.10

A.

Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation

with other work.

C. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

D. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

E. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated with zinc-rich primer.

2.12 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate.


2. Where bollards are indicated to receive push-button controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for push-button controls and hole for wire.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate welded to

bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard.

2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with

minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-

SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming:

1. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.


4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E.

F.

3.2

A.

B.

3.3

A.

B.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonmetallic non-shrink grout, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture;

use non-shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8-inch toward bollard.

B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.

Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

2. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 23.


C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

05 52 13-1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 05 52 13

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and tube railings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D.

E.

1.3

A.

B.

c.

1.4

A.

1.5

A.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

Welding certificates.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code- Aluminum." PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support


railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. 2. Braun, J. G., Company. 3. Wagner, R & B, Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, licensed in the State of Mississippi, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design

working stresses of railing materials based on the lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. lnfill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. lnfill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,

rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and

finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. Provide

Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.

D. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.


2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

2. Provide tamper resistant flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors:

1. Torque controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy

welded. Provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to m1mm1ze field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide

weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwise


indicated.

H. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

I. Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and

fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

J. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

K. Form changes in direction by flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.

L. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain

cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

0. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of

railings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.


B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been

coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from

parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting

railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing

components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

C. Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required

to accommodate thermal movement.

D. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and

welded to railing ends.

B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1 1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.

C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction


A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer.

B. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Tallahatchie County Tallahatchie County Community Safe Room Charleston, MS

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100‐1

SECTION 06 10 0

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Includes all labor, materials, services, equipment, and related items required for the complete

installation of Rough Carpentry work as indicated by the Contract Documents. B. Related Work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these specifications.

2. Section 08111 – Steel Doors and Frames. 3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Drywall


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Meet Requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed; 1. Products Standards PS 2. American Plywood Association APA, DFPA 3. Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI 4. American Wood Preservers Institute AWPI 5. National Forest Products Association NFPA 6. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIB

C. Material Grading 1. The grades of the materials used shall be defined by the rules of the recognized

associations of lumber manufacturers producing the material specified, but the maximum defects permissible in any specific grade shall not exceed the limitations of the American Lumber Standards.

2. Defects expressly prohibited by this Section shall not appear in the material used, even if permissible in the grade specifications.

3. The sized specified are nominal board measure dimensions unless otherwise noted.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01340 B. Certification:

1. Pressure treated wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amounts of salts retained, and conformance with applicable standards.

2. Preservation treated wood: Submit certification for water-borne preservative that moisture content was reduced to 19% maximum, after treatment.

C. Comply with pertinent provision of Section 01340.

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery to the job site, place materials in area protected from water. B. Store materials a minimum of 6” above ground on framework or blocking and cover with

protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of the building. D. Protect fire retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and

erection. E. Protect sheet materials from corner breakage and surface damage, while unloading. F. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640.

PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Framing Lumber: Grade marked, No. 2 common Southern Yellow Pine or construction grade Douglas Fir, moisture content under 19% free of warp that cannot be corrected by nailing, S4S.

B. Bracing, Blocking and Grounds: Grade marked No. 2 common Southern Yellow Pine or construction grade Douglas Fir, moisture content under 19%, S4S.

C. Underlayment: 11/32” APA rated plywood underlayment A/C, exterior exposure with fully sanded face, as manufactured by an APA member mill complying with PS-183.

D. Rough Hardware: Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, etc., shall be of the proper types and sizes, and used in such numbers and quantities as is the usual custom in good practice for securing the various items and members. Underlayment fasteners shall be 3d (1-1/4”) ring or screw shank nail, min 12-1/2 gauge (0.999 in) shank diameter, or 1-1/4” wood screws.

E. Plywood: Use C/D Exterior grade Fir or Yellow Pine, DFPC grade stamped, thickness as follows:

Shear walls: ½” thick Roof deck: ¾” thick Parapet backing: ½” thick Other applications: as noted on the drawings F. Plywood backer board at water treatment, electrical, telephone, video, and alarm equipment:

¾” APA rated A/C Plywood, Exterior. 2.02 PRESERVATIVES



A. Use lumber pressure treated with water-borne salt preservative, Wolman, Erdalith, or

Chemowater Zinc Chloride in accordance with AWPI Specifications P-5 for abutting concrete or masonry in damp locations, where in contact with the ground, concrete, plaster, stucco, or steel, including use for sills, plates, screeds, cant strips, blocking, nailers, and bucks.

B. Reduce moisture content to 19% or less after treatment for 2” thick lumber. C. Reduce moisture content to 23% or less after treatment for over 2” thick lumber. D. Furnish certificate from lumber treating company showing treatment amount and moisture

content after drying. E. Brush coat surfaces that have been cut after treatment with preservatives.

PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Curing and Repairing. Do such work as normally required and done for mechanical and other trades.

B. Blocking: Furnish and install blocking, furring, brackets, etc, as required to properly carry out all work shown and reasonably inferred by the Drawings and Specifications.

C. Underlayment Installation: 1. Acclimate underlayment by standing individual panels on edge in rooms where they are

to be installed 24 to 48 hours prior to installation. 2. Plywood underlayment shall be installed immediately before laying finished floor. 3. Install plywood underlayment smooth side up with face grain perpendicular to floor

joists. Stagger end joints in underlayment panels and offset end and edge joints of underlayment panels by at least two inches from joints in subfloor panels. Panel edges and ends shall be spaced 1/32”.

4. Underlayment nailing shall be 3” o.c. along edge 3/8” min to ½” max from edge and 6” o.c. each way in field. Begin in corner adjacent to previous panels working diagonally across to opposite corner. DO NOT TACK PANELS FIRST.

D. Nailers and Wood Cants: Nailers, 2” stock unless otherwise noted, of the proper widths. Bevel nailers for concrete ½” both sides and properly place in forms. Both nailers in place on steel or masonry. Furnish ledgers bolted to wall in locations shown and as required.

E. Shoring: Furnish and place all necessary shoring and bracing of types and sizes best suited for the conditions to be met. Shoring must comply with all governing requirements.

F. Provide wood curbs, required blocking and cants around all openings through the roof indicated on all drawings. Check drawings for all trades and furnish for all openings indicated.

G. Studs for interior walls shall be solid and continuous from floor to double plate and shall not be cut for straightening; warped studs shall be replaced.

H. Studs shall be doubled at all corners, openings, and beam bearing points. I. Plywood Backer Boards:

1. Electrical, Telephone, video, and alarm equipment locations: install ¾” plywood over gypsum board, fastening into studs @ 8” o.c. typical. When applied over masonry walls, install 1x3 furring @ 24” o.c.



2. Water Treatment Equipment: Paint all exposed edges/ends and install per directions above. Hold bottom edge of plywood ½” above finish floor and set in a continuous bead of caulking.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06445‐1

SECTION 06445

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 of these Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Finish Carpentry 2. Millwork 3. Solid-surfacing-material 4. Closet and utility shelving 5. Shop finishing of interior woodwork B. Interior architectural woodwork includes: wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet, hardware, and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B. Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant-treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details in full scale. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap

dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop applied transparent finishes 2. Shop applied opaque finishes 3. Plastic laminates E. Samples for Verification 1. Lumber with transparent finish, minimum 5’x20” for each species and cut. 2. Plastic laminates, 8”x10” for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.



3. Corner pieces as follows: a) Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,

minimum 18”x18”x6”. b) Miter joints for standing trim. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are similar to installation area.


A. Field Measurements: where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the

Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI’s quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Birch, plain sawn or sliced, unless indicated otherwise.



C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4

2. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.02 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8, Section “Door Hardware”.

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch thick metal as follows:

1. Semi-concealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semi-concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges: BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening, self-closing.

D. Back Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141; Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA

A156.9, B03131; Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071; Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B0313.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081, or BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B05091. I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball bearing slides.

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6-inches high and 24-inches wide.

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6-inches high or 24-inches wide.

4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3-inches high and 24-inches wide.

5. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1; for computer keyboard shelves. 6. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20-iches high and 16-

inches wide.

J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121 K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041 L. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, molded plastic

grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Color as selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.



M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated below as selected by the Engineer.

1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base.

2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base. 3. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base;

BHMA 636 for steel base. 4. Satin Chromium Plated: GHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 5. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 fro brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel

base. 6. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide custom grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood Members ¾-inch or less: 1/16-inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members more than ¾-inch: 1/8-inch.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

F. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.04 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay or Reveal overlay as indicated. C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: As indicated

1. Grain Direction: As indicated. D. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:



1. Surfaces other than drawer bodies: same species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2. Drawer sides and backs: solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed

surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Custom, unless indicated otherwise. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. D. Laminate cladding for exposed surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate complying with

following requirements:

1. Horizontal surfaces other than tops: Grade HGS. 2. Post-formed surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS. E. Materials for semi-exposed surfaces:

1. Surfaces other than drawer bodies: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. a) Edges of plastic laminate shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern,

and finish. b) For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer sides and backs: solid hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

F. Concealed backs of panels with exposed plastic laminate surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by the Engineer from laminate manufacturer’s full range of products. H. Provide dust panes of ¼-inch plywood above compartments and drawers, unless located

directly under tops.

2.06 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Custom, unless indicated otherwise. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by the Engineer from laminate manufacturer’s full range of products. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. F. Core Material at Sinks: Medium density fiberboard made with exterior glue or exterior

grade plywood.



G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.07 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Custom, unless indicated otherwise. B. Solid Surfacing Material Thickness: ½-inch unless indicated otherwise. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and

textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by the Engineer from laminate manufacturer’s full range of products.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surfacing material manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop applied backsplashes or loose backsplashes for field application.

E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.

2.08 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING

A. Grade: Custom B. Shelf Material: ¾-inch solid lumber. C. Cleats: ¾-inch solid lumber. D. Wood Species: Any closed grain hardwood.

2.09 SHOP FINISHING

A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at

fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9, Painting Section for finishing architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.

C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 9, Painting Section for material and application requirements.

D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply tow coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panes.

E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish.



3. Staining: Provide samples for Engineer. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed

grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Filled Finish for Open Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to

open grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 6. Sheen: To be determined by Owner and Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part II for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part II, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96-inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom at ends and not more than 16-

inches o.c. a) Use No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing,

blocking, or hanging strips. b) Use No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing

behind wall finish. c) Use toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.



1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inche sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16-inches o.c. and to walls

with adhesive. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7, Sealants. H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail

holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION

07 21 00-1 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

1.3

A.

B.

1.4

A.

SUMMARY Section includes foam plastic board insulation.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Surface Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and mm1mum compressive

strength indicated below, with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.

07 21 00-2 THERMAL INSULATION

2. Type IV, 25 psi.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications indicated.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.2

A.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches below exterior grade line.

PROTECTION

Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

07 52 16 - 1 SBS MOD BIT ROOFING

SECTION 07 52 16

SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN HOT APPLIED ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL The project, Charleston Safe Room located in Charleston, MS, includes the provision of a complete Building Products SBS Modified Bitumen Membrane Roofing.

1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install an asphaltic membrane roofing system meeting the roofing manufacturer's

requirements for the specified warranty, including: 1. Preparation of roofing substrates. 2. Wood nailers for roofing attachment. 3. Insulation. 4. SBS Modified Bitumen membrane roofing. 5. Metal roof edging and copings. 6. Flashings. 7. Walkway pads. 8. Other roofing-related items specified or indicated on the drawings or otherwise necessary to

provide a complete weatherproof roofing system.

B. Disposal of demolition debris and construction waste is the responsibility of Contractor. Perform disposal in manner complying with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

C. Strictly comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane manufacturer. Refer to technical information of the manufacturer.

D. Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the project conditions.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers associated with roofing and roof insulation.

B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items associated with roofing.

C. Section 07 71 00 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, and other flashing-related items.

D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches, vents, and manufactured curbs.

E. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Specialties: Roof drains.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not

otherwise defined in the section.

B. LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance, as defined by ASTM1289-13ei.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Referenced Standards: These standards form part of this specification only to the extent they are

referenced as specification requirements. 1. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2010. 2. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012.


3. ASTM C209 - Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012. 4. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. 5. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board; 2013. 6. ASTM D1079 - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous

Materials; 2013. 7. ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics;

2010. 8. ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008. 9. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. 10. ASTM D6163 – Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified

Bituminous Sheet Materials using Glass Fiber Reinforcements 11. ASTM D6164 – Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified

Bituminous Sheet Materials using Polyester Reinforcements 12. 13. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual System; 2007. 14. FM DS 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components; Factory Mutual

System; 2006. 15. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 16. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010. 17. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing

Systems; 2010 or current enforced edition. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting to

discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty. 1. Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or affected

by the performance of roofing work. 2. Notify Architect well in advance of meeting.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: 1. Provide membrane manufacturer's printed submittal package to show that all components of

roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing membrane.

2. Where UL or FM requirements are specified, provide documentation that shows that the roofing system to be installed is UL-Classified or FM-approved, as applicable; include data itemizing the components of the classified or approved system.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.

D. Shop Drawings: Provide: 1. The roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all

relevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansion joints, penetrations, and drains.

2. For tapered insulation, provide project-specific layout and dimensions for each board.

E. Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN) has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer.

F. Executed Warranty as a requirement of project closeout.

G. Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work.

H. Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.


1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following:

1. Current Active Firestone Licensed Contractor status. 2. Current approval, license, or authorization as applicator by the manufacturer. 3. At least five years experience in installing specified system. 4. Capability to provide a payment performance bond to building Owner.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels

intact and legible.

B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.

C. Do not overload the structure with stored materials.

D. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.

1.09 WARRANTY A. See Division 01 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications, scheduling, and inspections.

C. Warranty: Firestone 20-year Red Shield Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other indicated components of the system, for the noted term.

D. Limit of Liability: No Dollar Limit.

1. Examples of criteria include the repair of leaks in the roofing system caused by: a. Manufacturing defects in Firestone brand materials. b. Defective workmanship used to install these materials. c. Damage due to winds up to 55 mph.

2. Examples of criteria excluded from warranty action includes: a. Damage due to winds in excess of 55 mph. b. Damage due to hurricanes or tornadoes. c. Hail. d. Intentional damage. e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products, CertainTeed Corp, GAF Materials Corporation, or equal. 1. Roofing systems manufactured by others are acceptable provided the roofing system is

completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions and the manufacturer meets the following qualifications: a. Specializing in manufacturing the roofing system to be provided. b. Minimum ten years of experience manufacturing the type of roofing to be provided. c. Able to provide a no dollar limit, single source roof system warranty that is backed by

corporate assets in excess of one billion dollars. d. ISO 9002 certified. e. Able to provide isocyanurate insulation that is produced in its own facilities. f. Roofing systems manufactured by the companies listed below are acceptable provided

they are completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions.

B. Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.

C. Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane. 1. Metal roof edging products by other manufacturers are not acceptable. 2. Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are not acceptable.


D. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. 1. Submit evidence that the proposed substitution complies with the specified requirements.

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Roofing System: Styrene-butadiene-styrene [SBS] modified bitumen membrane. 1. Membrane and Attachment: Mineral granule surfaced cap sheet and base sheet hot asphalt

applied. 2. Granule Color: White 3. Comply with applicable local building code requirements. 4. Provide assembly having Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Class A, Fire Hazard

Classification. 5. Provide assembly complying with Factory Mutual Corporation (FM) Roof Assembly

Classification, FM DS 1-28 and 1-29, and meeting minimum requirements of FM 1-525 wind uplift rating per roofnav number 408696-389938-0

B. Cover Board: Gypsum-Based non-combustible, water resistant gypsum core with embedded glass mat facers Cover Board: 1. Thickness: 0.5 inch (12.7mm). 2. R-Value (LTTR): 2.5 based on ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

a. Attachment: Low-rise polyurethane adhesive.

C. Insulation: 1. Total System R Value: 8.6, minimum. 2. Maximum Board Thickness: 1.5 inches (37.5 mm);

1. Top Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite. a. Attachment: Low-rise polyurethane adhesive.

2.03 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN MATERIALS A. Cap Sheet: Granule surfaced SBS polymer-modified bitumen sheet, complying with ASTM D

6163 Type I, Grade G, with the following additional characteristics: 1. Formulated for hot asphalt adhesive application. 2. Reinforcing Fabric: 1.8 lb/100 ft2 (90 gram/m2) fiberglass mat 3. Nominal Thickness: 0.150 inch (3.8 mm). 4. Sheet Width: 3.3 feet (1 m), nominal. 5. Acceptable Product: SBS Glass FR by Firestone, CertainTeed Corp, GAF Materials

Corporation, or equal.

B. Base Sheet: SBS polymer-modified bitumen sheet, complying with ASTM D 6163 Type I, Grade S, with the following additional characteristics: 1. Reinforcing Fabric: 1.8 lb/100ft2 (90 gram/m2) non-woven glass fiber mat. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.090 inch (2.2 mm). 3. Net Mass: 52 lb/100ft2 (2,692 gram/m2). 4. Sheet Width: 3.3 feet (1 m), nominal. 5. Acceptable Product: SBS Base by Firestone, CertainTeed Corp, GAF Materials Corporation,

or equal.

2.04 COVER BOARD AND ROOF INSULATION A. Cover Board: Gypsum-Based non-combustible, water resistant gypsum core with embedded

glass mat facers, complying with ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, and with the following additional characteristics: 1. Size: 48 inches (1220 mm) by 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal. 2. Thickness: 0.5 inch (12.7mm). 3. Surface Water Absorption: 2.5 g, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 473. 4. Spanning Capability: Recommended by manufacturer for following minimum flute spans:


5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 0, smoke developed of 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

6. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 7. Factory Mutual approved for use with FM 1-60 and 1-90 rated roofing assemblies. 8. Mold Growth Resistance: Zero growth, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 for

minimum of 4 weeks.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam with black glass reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1, with the following additional characteristics:

1. Thickness: As indicated elsewhere. 2. Size: 48 inches (1220 mm) by 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal.

a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than 48 inches (1220 mm) by 48 inches (1220 mm), nominal.

3. Compressive Strength: 20 psi (138 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1289.

4. Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents. 5. Recycled Content: 19 percent post-consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average. 6. Top Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite.

a. Attachment: Low-rise polyurethane adhesive. 7. Acceptable Product: ISO 95+ GL Polyisocyanurate Insulation by Firestone, or equal.

C. Adhesive for Insulation Attachment: Type as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing system and warranty to be provided; use only adhesives furnished by roof membrane manufacturer.

2.07 METAL ACCESSORIES A. Metal Roof Edging and Fascia: Continuous metal edge member serving as termination of roof

membrane and retainer for metal fascia; watertight with no exposed fasteners; mounted to roof edge nailer. 1. Wind Performance:

a. Membrane Pull-Off Resistance: 100 lbs/ft (1460 N/m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-1, current edition.

b. Fascia Pull-Off Resistance: At least the minimum required when tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-2, current edition.

c. Provide product listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation Approval Guide with at least FM 1-270 rating.

2. Fascia Face Height: 5 inches (127 mm). 3. Edge Member Height Above Nailer: 1-1/4 inches (31 mm). 4. Fascia Material and Finish: 24 gage, 0.024 inch (0.06 mm) galvanized steel with Kynar 500

finish in manufacturer's standard color; matching concealed joint splice plates; factory-installed protective plastic film.

5. Length: 144 inches (3650 mm). 6. Functional Characteristics: Fascia retainer supports while allowing for free thermal cycling of

fascia. 7. Aluminum Bar: Continuous 6063-T6 alloy aluminum extrusion with pre-punched slotted holes;

miters welded; injection molded EPDM splices to allow thermal expansion. 8. Anchor Bar Cleat: 20 gage, 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) G90 coated commercial type galvanized

steel with pre-punched holes. 9. Curved Applications: Factory modified. 10. Fasteners: Factory-provided corrosion resistant fasteners, with drivers; no exposed fasteners

permitted. 11. Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for complete

installation, including miters, scuppers, and end caps; minimum 14 inch (355 mm) long legs on corner pieces.

12. Scuppers: Welded watertight.


13. Accessories: Provide matching brick wall cap, downspout, extenders, and other special fabrications as shown on the drawings.

B. Parapet Copings: Formed metal coping with galvanized steel anchor/support cleats for capping any parapet wall; watertight, maintenance free, without exposed fasteners; butt type joints with concealed splice plates; mechanically fastened as indicated; Firestone PTCF, or equal. 1. Wind Performance:

a. At least the minimum required when tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-3, current edition.

b. Provide product listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation Approval Guide with at least FM 1-90 rating.

2. Description: Coping sections allowed to expand and contract freely while locked in place on anchor cleats by mechanical pressure from hardened stainless steel springs factory attached to anchor cleats; 8 inch (200 mm) wide splice plates with factory applied dual non-curing sealant strips capable of providing watertight seal.

3. Material and Finish: 24 gage, 0.024 inch (0.06 mm) thick galvanized steel with Kynar 500 finish in manufacturer's standard color; matching concealed joint splice plates; factory-installed protective plastic film.

4. Dimensions: a. Wall Width: As indicated on the drawings. b. Piece Length: Minimum 144 inches (3650 mm). c. Curved Application: Factory fabricated in true radius.

5. Anchor/Support Cleats: 20 gage, 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick prepunched galvanized cleat with 12 inch (305 mm) wide stainless steel spring mechanically locked to cleat at 72 inches (1820 mm) on center.

6. Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for complete installation, including miters, corners, intersections, curves, pier caps, and end caps; minimum 14 inch (355 mm) long legs on corner, intersection, and end pieces.

7. Fasteners: Factory-furnished; electrolytically compatible; minimum pull out resistance of 240 pounds (109 kg) for actual substrate used; no exposed fasteners.

2.08 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine, Douglas

Fir; or PS 1, APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated. 1. Width: 3-1/2 inches (90 mm), nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof

accessory to be attached to it. 2. Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation.

B. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: 45 degree face slope and minimum 5 inch (127 mm) face dimension; provide at all angle changes between vertical and horizontal planes that exceed 45 degrees. 1. Type: Wood fiber, complying with ASTM C208. 2. Install using low rise foam adhesive, hot asphalt (Type III or IV), roofing mastic, or

mechanically fastened using fasteners and plates approved by roofing manufacturer.

PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation period.

C. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.


D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.

E. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition at the end of each work day.

F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F (15 to 25 degrees C).

G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work. 1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings. 2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives, and

sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray. 3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by

other trades.

H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.

I. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.

3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their

mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform deck.

B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the substrate before commencing with roofing work.

C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.

D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of project conditions and requirements.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the

building through air intakes.

B. Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that may damage the membrane.

C. Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide with fill material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer.

D. Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building.

3.04 ASPHALT APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Apply by machine or by hand. Follow all industry and manufacturer requirements for heating,

storage and handling of asphalt. Do not apply asphalt or ply sheets if asphalt temperature is above or below that recommended.

B. During installation of the membrane, keep mop full with proper amounts of asphalt; do not scrub with the mop when applying the asphalt. Asphalt in this application is used as an adhesive for the modified bitumen membrane and should be installed at approximately 400° F at the point of application at a rate of 20-25 lbs per 100 square feet.


C. Extend hot asphalt application not more than 5 to 10 feet (1.5 to 3 meters) beyond roll currently being installation and no more than 48 inches (1220 mm) when the temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).

D. Keep roof top traffic to a minimum on newly applied membrane and for a period after in order to minimize damage and bitumen displacement. Set rolls from the “cold” side of the roof.

E. Roll the roofing membrane into the hot bitumen with positive pressure to assure firm and uniform attachment to the asphalt without creating any voids or wrinkles.

3.07 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under

Roofing System.

B. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.

C. Lay short edge of insulation board in courses parallel to metal roof deck flutes.

D. Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

E. Adhesive Attachment: Apply in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and recommendations; "walk-in" and weight down individual roof insulation boards to obtain maximum adhesive contact.

3.08 MODIFIED BITUMEN INSTALLATION WITH HOT ASPHALT A. In air temperature below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), unroll sheets and allow to relax; flatten

with broom if necessary to eliminate voids and obtain proper embedment.

B. Start at the low point with a full width sheet; embed sheets in full mopping of asphalt.

C. Maintain one-half sheet stagger between first and second layer; install with minimum 3 inch (75 mm) side laps and 6 inch (150 mm) end laps; keep sheets free of wrinkles, buckles and fish mouths.

D. Apply asphalt at rate recommended by roof membrane manufacturer; a minor flow of hot asphalt should be seen coming from the side laps.

E. Complete the entire membrane installation without undue delay. 1. Exception: The cap sheet may be installed not more than 14 days after installation of the

interply base sheet. a. Before resuming installation, be sure the surface of the last sheet is clean and dry;

broomed and cleaned sufficiently using the necessary equipment. b. Remove materials that show evidence of water intrusion and replace with like material. c. Cover materials that have been damaged with additional layers of ply sheets installed

over them equal in quantity to those originally installed. d. Prime the surface using asphalt primer at rate recommended by roofing manufacturer.

3.09 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required by

membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.

B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto membrane. 1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation. 3. Install sealant under the membrane anchorage leg. 4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install

additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.


6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the metal edging, install an additional piece of flashing over the metal lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the two flashing sections.

C. Scuppers: Set in sealant and secure to structure; flash as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Roofing Expansion Joints: Install as shown on drawings and as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

E. Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the roofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches (200 mm) high above membrane surface. 1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces. 2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with

membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof before adhering flashing to the

vertical surface. 4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings.

F. Roof Drains: 1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use

specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to achieve slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Install formable flashing according to manufacturer’s details 3. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12 to 19 mm) of

membrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts. 4. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to

bolt holes. 5. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane 6. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve constant

compression.

G. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing seals directly to the penetration. 1. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide fluid applied flashing in accordance

with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Flexible and Moving Penetrations: Provide weathertight gooseneck set in sealant and

secured to deck, flashed as recommended by manufacturer.

3.10 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require

maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings. 1. Use like granular faced membrane of a contrasting color, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not install walkway pads within 10 feet (30 m) of any roof edge or perimeter -- these areas

require loose-laid pavers as walking surfaces.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical

Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).

B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.

3.12 CLEANING A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including

bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings.

B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and surfaces.


C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.

3.13 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable protection

and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.

END OF SECTION

07 71 00-1 ROOF SPECIALTIES

SECTION 07 71 00

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes roof edge flashings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1. Product Test Reports. 2. Certification that product meet specified performance requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations,

keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of

expansion and contraction. 2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory applied color

finishes.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings and roof-edge flashings. Roof Deck Systems for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community shelters and other areas of refuge to resiste the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in FEMA P-361 March,2015.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.



A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high

humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.7 \/\ARRANT

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 2. Chalking in excess of a No.8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. 3. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil Coated Finishes:

a. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

b. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.


A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to

meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching

color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-

dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.



A. Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Manufacture and install copings roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable

of resisting the same design pressures as the roof membrane specified in Section 07 54 23.

C. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Temperature change (range) of 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.5 ROOF EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal

fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous formed- or extruded- aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hickman

Company, W. P., Econosnap, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. Metal-Era, Inc. c. Metai-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. d. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.

2. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from formed Aluminum: Thickness as required to meet performance requirements. a. Finish: Two coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded. 4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and

without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking 1-1/4 inches for nails

and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.3 ROOF EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with

concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.


C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

07 92 00-1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous

joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants

in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative


present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:

a. Install joint sealants in 60 inch long joints using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.

b. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2 inch piece.

c. Use fingers to grasp 2 inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1 inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.

d. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.

6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

7. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

D. Mockups:

1. Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

2. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating

manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and

substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants

capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant

manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated below as manufactured by Pecora or comparable product by one of the following: 1. BASF Building Systems. 2. Dow Corning Corporation. 3. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. 4. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. 5. Tremco Incorporated.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the

weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

2.3 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Joint sealants for vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces; general use exterior

sealant. 1. Exterior joint sealant for general use for perimeter joints and expansion joints, unless

otherwise indicated. a. Description: Medium-modulus, single-component, non-sag, pre-pigmented

material, silicone joint sealant; 895NST Silicone Sealant. b. Applicable Standards: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G,

A and 0. c. Primer: As required by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and

to prevent staining of substrates. 2. Exterior joint sealant for plant precast concrete joints.

a. Description: Low-modulus, single-component, pre-pigmented material, silicone joint sealant; 890NST Silicone Sealant.

b. Applicable Standards: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A and 0.

c. Primer: As required by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and

07 92 DO- 4 JOINT SEALANTS

to prevent staining of substrates. 3. Exterior and interior miscellaneous glass glazing.

a. Description: Low modulus, high-performance, one-part, moisture curing silicone joint sealant; 864NST Silicone Sealant.

b. Applicable Standards: ASTM C920, TypeS, Grade N.S., Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A and 0, and TT-S-00001543A, Class A.

c. Primer: As required by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and to prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.

4. Interior joint sealant for general interior walls and ceilings; general use interior sealant. a. Description: Siliconized acrylic latex sealant, paintable, minimum 15 colors; AC-20

Acrylic Latex Sealant. b. Applicable Standards: ASTM C834. c. Primer: As required by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and

to prevent staining of adjacent surfaces. 5. Exterior and interior joint sealant for structural glass glazing and secondary seals.

a. Description: Two-part high modulus structural silicone sealant; 895NST Silicone Sealant.

b. Applicable Standards: ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G and A.

c. Primers as required by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and to prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.

B. Joint Sealant for Horizontal Traffic Surfaces:

1. Description: One part, self-leveling silicone joint sealant; Urexpan NR-200 Urethane Sealant.

2. Applicable Standards: ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, A and 0. TTS-00227E, Type 1, Class A.

3. Primers as recommended by joint sealant manufacturer to obtain optimum adhesion and to prevent staining of adjacent surfaces.

C. Sanitary Sealant: Single component, low odor, neutral-curing silicone expressly developed for

interior applications requiring a high degree of cleanliness and freedom from bacterial growth; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant. Refer to application locations below. 1. Applicable Standards: TT-S-001543A, TT-S-00230C, Class A and ASTM C 920, Class

25. 2. Locations: Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters, all

joints in food preparation areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and


approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between

sealants and back of joints.

E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

END OF SECTION

08 11 13 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORSAND FRAMES

SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes the following: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Tornado resistant hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SOl A250.8.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. B. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

B. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

08 11 13-2 HOLLOW METAL DOORSAND FRAMES

C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

D. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a

vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

E. Provide minimum 1/4 inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. Ambico Limited. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Curries Company. 4. Republic Doors and Frames. 5. Steelcraft. 6. Windsor Republic Doors.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Tornado Resistant Doors: Door Systems for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)

community shelters and other areas of refuge to resist the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in FEMA P-361 March, 2015. 1. Safe Room Design Wind Speed: 200 mph 2. Missile Speed (15 lb. 2x4 board member) and Safe Room Impact Surface:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 60 mph b. Horizontal Surfaces: 90 mph

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Standard Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.

08 11 13- 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORSAND FRAMES

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic coated, cold rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, or mineral board, with vertical steel stiffeners. 3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

b. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

C. Maximum Duty Doors and Frames (Tornado Resistant): SDI A250.8, Level 4.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic coated, cold rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, or mineral board, with vertical steel stiffeners. 3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Maximum Duty Doors and Frames (Tornado Resistant): SDI A250.8, Level 4.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum

A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

f. Core: Polystyrene, Polyurethane, or Polyisocyanurate with vertical steel stiffeners. g. Thermal Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-

value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with

minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.


2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Masonry Type Jamb Anchors: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

B. Post-installed Expansion Type for In Place Concrete: Minimum 3/8 inch diameter bolts with

expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

C. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, clip type

anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with

minimum A40 metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: 1. ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill

phosphatized. 2. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTMA1011/A1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTMA153/A153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Powder Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame spread and smoke development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry

film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where

08 11 13- HOLLOW METAL DOORSAND FRAMES

practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,

flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot

welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.

Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: a. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. b. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. c. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. d. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or

fraction thereof above 120 inches high. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as

follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or

hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SOl A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 Sections.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

B. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast curing, lead and chromate free primer complying

with ANSI/SOl A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: Provide sight proof stationary louvers for interior doors constructed with inverted V-

shaped or Y-shaped blades for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SOl 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020 inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032 inch thick steel frame.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to

plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel

lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from

head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply

with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SOl A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. 2. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth

08 11 13-6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


and undamaged. a. At fire protection rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents. 3. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and

secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

5. In Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

Tallahatchie County Community Safe Room Charleston, MS

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211‐1

SECTION 08211

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-core doors as follows:

1. Doors with medium-density overlay faces.

2. All products shall be delivered to the job site.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts fire ratings; and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: For each face material and finish.


A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated.", Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade, and NWWDA I.S. 1 “Industry Standards for Wood Flush Doors”. Where conflicts occur the AWI Quality Standard shall govern.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Specific Product Warranty: Submit two copies of written agreement on door manufacturer’s standard form signed by Manufacture, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.

B. The warranty shall include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.



The warranty for solid core flush interior doors shall be in effect for the lifetime of the installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. Weyerhaeuser (Marshfield) Company. 4. Maiman 5. VT Industries.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Faces: AWI Premium Grade. 2. Species and Cut: Birch- Rotary cut. (all doors unless noted otherwise). Oak Rotary cut

doors P254B, P257A, P257B, P257C, and P264. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance match. 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 6. Edge Stiles: Solid hardwood to match face veneers without finger jointing. 7. Adhesive: NWWDA I.S. 1.6 Type I. 8. Glazing Stops: to match Timely Frame color.

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Particle Board Core Doors: 1. Construction: Shall conform to ANSI A208.1 LD-2 32lb. density core. 2. Option to Bid: Veneer-Faced SCL- Stave Core Lumber

C. Factory fit doors to suit Timely frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

E. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

Match Timely “Alumatone SC108” Frame finish.



2.3 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.

D. Natural Finish.

E. Effect: Semi-filled finish.

F. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


E. No doors shall be delivered to the building until weatherproof storage space is available. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 30 and 60 percent. Stack doors flat and off the floor, supported to prevent warpage. Protect doors from damage and direct exposure to sunlight.

F. Factory finished doors shall be individually wrapped in polybags to protect the finish from damage by contact with other doors.



G. Do not walk or place other material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors across one another.

H. Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors from damage prior to, during, and after installation. All damaged doors shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION

08 31 13- 1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 31 13

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1. Product Test Reports. 2. Certification that project meet specified performance requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.

D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCEREQU EMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 1OB for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.

B. Access Doors and Frames for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community shelters and other areas of refuge to resist the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in FEMA 361 I March, 2015.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis. 3. J. L. Industries, Inc.. 4. Karp Associates, Inc. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Milcor Inc. 7. Nystrom, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's

standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Walls.

08 31 13-2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage. 4. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 5. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Hardware: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.

D. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.

2. Locations: Walls. 3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage. 4. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 5. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Hardware: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.

E. Fire Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.

2. Locations: Wall. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 4. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 5. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch, 20 gage. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Cam latch operated by screwdriver.

2.3

A.

B.

C.

MATERIALS Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

2.4

A.

B.

FABRICATION General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely

attached to perimeter of frames. 2. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.

08 31 13-3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

2.5 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and

chromate free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

3.2

A.

B.

3.3

A.

B. 3.4

A.

B.

EXAMINATION Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

ADJUSTING

Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

ACCESS DOOR TYPES

At gypsum board surfaces provide drywall bead frames. At all fire rated and masonry surfaces provide exposed frames.

END OF SECTION

08 42 13‐1 Security Aluminum Entrance

FEMA‐P‐361 ALUMINUM WIND/IMPACT RESISTANT DOOR SYSTEM SECTION 08 42 13.13 –SECURITY ALUMINUM ENTRANCES ‐ WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM DOOR ASSEMBLIES (FOR USE IN FEMA P‐361, March, 2015 / ICC‐500‐08 STORM SHELTERS) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Impact and Wind Resistant Aluminum Door Assemblies


A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

B. Product Data: For each type of door assembly, including manufacturer recommended installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

D. Samples: For each exposed finish.


A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with requirements

B. Warranty: Sample of finish warranty

C. Delegated Design: For assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including structural calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. See Section 01 34 00 Delegated Design Requirements and Section 01 35 00 Delegated Design Submittals.

D. Special Inspection Report: As indicated in: Not Required 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 77 00 Closeout Submittals.

B. Maintenance data. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY


A. Door System: Manufacturer’s warranty against defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of 1 year from the date of invoice.

B. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty against deterioration of factory finishes for the period of 10 years from the date of invoice.

C. Glass Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty against defects in material and workmanship resulting in edge separation or delamination for a period of 5 years from the date of invoice.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide StormDefend™ SD‐TH350 Aluminum Full‐Vision FEMA‐361 Tornado Door System by Protective Structures or Survivalite Impact Window Systems, Citadel Storefront System, or approved equal.

B. Description:

1. Factory fabricated door assembly constructed from either 6005‐T5 or 6105‐T5 extruded aluminum.

2. Dimensions: Wide Stile Door a. Stiles: 5 inches by 2‐3/8 inches b. Top Rail: 7 inches by 2‐3/8 inches c. Bottom Rail: 8‐1/2 inches by 2‐3/8 inches d. Glazing Stops: 1 inch face e. Max Size: 3/6 x 8/0 (singles), 7/0 x 8/0 (pairs)

3. Dimensions: Door Frame: Use in combination with 2‐1/2” x 6” SD‐TH600 Framing

System

2.2. GLAZING

A. Wind and Impact Laminated Glass Clad Polycarbonate : TOR‐GARD NBR2 (clear or tinted)

2.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Indicated areas of this project have been designed for occupancy as a storm shelter. The Work identified in this Section is a component of that security occupancy as follows:

1. Type of Shelter: Tornado.

B. Shelter Design Wind Speeds: 250 MPH or As indicated on Drawings.

1. Tornado 250 MPH

C. Debris Hazard


1. FEMA P‐361 2015 Compliant: Pass missile‐impact tests according to FEMA P‐361 2015 / ICC 500‐2008 in accordance with:

a. ASTM E1886 ‐ Standard Test Method For Performance Of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors And Impact Protective Systems Impacted By Missiles and Exposed To Cyclic Pressure Differentials

b. ASTM E1996 ‐ Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.

2. Tornado: Resists impact of a 15 pound 2 by 4 at 100 MPH

D. Pressure Testing

1. FEMA P‐361 2015 Compliant: Pass static pressure tests and cyclic tests according to FEMA P‐361 2015/ICC 500‐2008 in accordance with:

a. ASTM E330 ‐ Standard Test Method For Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: All joints and connections shall be tight, providing hairline joints and true alignment of adjacent members

B. Door corner joinery of extruded and keyed aluminum spline with a continuous 3/8 inch diameter steel tie rod at top and bottom rails.

2.5 FINISH

A. Factory‐applied finish:

1. PVDF‐Based Coating: Fluoropolymer finish containing minimum 70 percent PVDF resins, in accordance with AAMA 2605 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”

b. Coats: four coat system, c. Color: to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Fully concealed

2.7 DOOR HARDWARE

In accordance with ICC-500-08 Section 503.1, door locks and latching must be part of the tested door assembly. The door manufacturer will identify available hardware options and functions appropriate for


the project through the submittal process. The submittal must include project specific hardware function requirements and components.

A. Manufacturer’s standard door hardware to include: a. Select SL‐11HD Continuous Hinge b. Securitech 7000 Series Panic Device with 2‐Point Locking System c. LCN 4040 Door Closer d. Approved equal.

B. OPTIONS:

a. Panic Bar b. Latch Lock c. Thumb Turn

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify field dimensions of opening prior to fabrication of door assemblies. B. Prepare openings to be in tolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in

accordance with approved shop drawings.

C. Coordinate structural requirements to ensure proper attachment and support.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings.

B. Provide required support and securely fasten and set doors and frames plumb, square, and level without twist or bow.

C. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at all specified areas as shown on shop drawings and detailed in installation instructions. Wipe off excess, and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth.


A. Adjust door to provide for weather tightness and leave doors clean and free of construction debris. Strictly adhere to the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION


A. Protect doors, framing and glazing from damage during subsequent construction activities. If damage occurs, remove and replace as required at no additional cost to the Owner to provide doors in their original, undamaged condition.

END OF SECTION

085113-1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum windows for exterior locations. 2. Glazing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C.

D.

1.3

A.

B.

C.

1.4

A.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.

Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


Product test reports. Certification that products meet specified performance requirements.

Sample warranties.

WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Window: 1 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lnsulgard Security products; TH600 Architectural Aluminum Framing System or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armortex Inc. 2. Approved substitution.

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Window and glazing systems for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community

shelters and other areas of refuge to resist the design wind pressures and missile impact loads

08 51 13-2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

as detailed in FEMA P-361 March, 2015.

B.

2.3

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

2.4

A.

B.

2.5

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Product Standard: AAMAIWDMAICSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Minimum Performance Class AW.

MATERIALS

Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221; 6061 alloy, TS temper typical, 6061 alloy, T6 temper for extruded structural members. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.

Sheet Steel: ASTM A 924/A 924M; galvanized to minimum G90.

Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A3 6M; galvanized to minimum G90.

Fasteners: Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard. Glazing: Glass clad polycarbonate 1.6 inches thick, FEMA P-361 March, 2015, UL

Listed Level 4. ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Operating Types: Fixed. Frames: Non-thermal aluminum extrusions.

FABRICATION

Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.


A. High Performance Organic Finish: 2 coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color and gloss as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,

085113-3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

and other components.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal

movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture

migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective

coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes mechanical door hardware for swinging doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

c. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each

door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor

plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and

frame. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer certifying that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire rated doors complies with listed fire rated door assemblies.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of

comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

08 71 00- 1 DOOR HARDWARE


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware schedule.

1.5 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Provide one set of special tools as supplied by hardware manufacturer, for each different or special hardware component.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Engineer, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).

C. Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

D. Where fire rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in

assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 1OC, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet

requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105 with a maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3 inch wg of water.

F. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do

not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

G. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC 2015/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non Fire Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

08 71 00-2 DOOR HARDWARE

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 30 0. In addition to Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, and degree of security required. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys.

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to

Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Distribute installation templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory

prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise

indicated. a. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Tornado Resistant Doors: Perimeter exterior door Systems for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community shelters and other areas of refuge to resist the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in FEMA P-361 MARCH, 2015.

2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article

to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products

equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each

door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2.3 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow metal

doors and hollow metal frames. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors,

and minimum 1/2 inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2 3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lever Trim: Through bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design is unacceptable. Provide security design independent break away spindles so that breakage of outside lever does not allow access to inside lever hubworks.

E. Thumbturns: Accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate.

F. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

G. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.


2.5

A.

2.6

A.

B.

C.

2.7

A.

EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule. LOCK CYLINDERS Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Same manufacturer as for locking devices. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. KEYING Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. Grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver or Brass. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2.8 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two keys, with tamper switches to connect to intrusion

detection system. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. GE Security, Inc. 2. HPC, Inc. 3. Knox Company.

2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack and pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch

speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following:

2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule.

2.11 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by

08 71 00- 5 DOOR HARDWARE

manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule.

2.12 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule.

2.13 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 inch thick stainless steel;

with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule.

2.14 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming

method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and

elsewhere as indicated.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections

before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings or if not

indicated ANSI/SOl A250.8 unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction

period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Demonstrate that the construction key is no longer operable. 3. Return temporary cores to hardware supplier.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Section 07 90 0.

F. Apply to perimeter gasketing head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

G. Apply door bottoms to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.



A. Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

B. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each

report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. Adjust sweep period of door closers to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural

Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Section 01 70 0.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

HW Set: 01 Door Number: 101A

Each to have: 3 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 1 ea Rim Exit Device w/alarm 8888F 32D SAR 1 ea Surface Closer 4111 HEDA 689 LCN 1 ea Kick Plate 8400 10" X 34" LDW 32D IVE 1 ea Rain Drip 16A 628 NGP 1 set Seals 160SA CLR NGP 1 ea Threshold 425E AL NGP


HW Set: 02 Door Number: 106A & 106B Each to have

3 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 1 ea Rim Exit Device 8888F 32D SAR 1 ea Night Latch Pull Trim 814-MSL 32D SAR 1 ea Surface Closer 4111 HEDA 689 LCN 1 ea Kick Plate 8400 10" X 34" LDW 32D IVE 1 ea Rain Drip 16A 628 NGP 1 set Seals 160SA CLR NGP 1 ea Threshold 425E AL NGP

HW Set 03 Door Number: 100A Bronzed Aluminum Glazed with double cylinder keyed deadbolt (SAR) with closers, flush bolts, pull handles, threshold, and seals per manufacturer.

HW Set: 04 Door Number: 100B Each to have:

6 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 2 ea Rim Exit Device 8888F 32D SAR 2 ea Night Latch Pull Trim 814-MSL 32D SAR 2 ea Surface Closer 4111 HEDA 689 LCN 2 ea Kick Plate 8400 10" X 34" LDW 32D IVE

2 ea Threshold 425E AL NGP

HWSet: 05 Door Number: 103 Each to have:

3 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 1 ea Storeroom Lock 6G05 32D SAR 1 ea Surface Closer 4111 HEDA 689 LCN 1 ea Kick Plate 8400 10" X 34" LDW 32D IVE 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CCV 630 IVE 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY IVE

HWSet: 06 Door Number: 102 Each to have

3 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 1 ea Office Lock 6G05 32D SAR 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CCV 630 IVE 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY IVE HW Set: 07 Door Number: 104, 105 Each to have 3 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 1 ea Push Plat 8200 4”x16” 630 IVE 1 ea Pull Plate 8303 4”x16” 630 IVE 1 ea Kick Plate 8400 10" X 34" LDW 32D IVE 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CCV 630 IVE 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY


HWSet: 08 Door Number: 107 Each to have

6 ea Hinge BB11994545 NR 32D HAG 2 ea Entry Lock 8xG04 32D SAR 2 ea Dead Bolts 485 630 SAR 2 ea Strike Plate 408 630 SAR 6 ea Silencer SR64 GRY IVE


089119-1 FIXED LOUVERS

SECTION 08 91 19

FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

SUMMARY Section includes fixed metal tornado resistant louvers.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. Delegated Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and windborne debris impact resistance performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by professional engineer licensed in the State of Mississippi responsible for their preparation.


A. Windborne debris impact resistance test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXED METAL LOUVERS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenheck Fan Corporation; FSG-801 or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Airolite Company, LLC (The). 2. Ohio Gratings, Inc. 3. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.

B.

C. D.

E.

2.2

A.

Mounting: Cantilever style Frame: 8 x 0.25 inch hot rolled steel, frame flanges located at top and bottom or sides.

Blades: Inverted V style, 0.25 inch thick hot rolled steel.

Construction: Welded.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural windborne debris impact resistance performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


B. Tornado Resistant Louvers: Louvers for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community shelters and other areas of refuge to resist the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in FEMA P-361 MARCH, 2015. 1. Safe Room Design Wind Speed: 200 mph 2. Missile Speed (15 lb. 2x4 board member) and Safe Room Impact Surface:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 60 mph. b. Horizontal Surfaces: 90 mph.

C. Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within

limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

D. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. Determine wind

loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens

are attached.

C.

2.4

A.

B.

2.5

A.

B.

Louver Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2 inch square mesh, 0.047 inch wire.

MATERIALS

Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. For color finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

FABRICATION

Fabricate frames of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair according to ASTM A 780.

C. Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard finish.


D. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of

corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

END OF SECTION

09 29 00- 1 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

1.3

A.

SUMMARY Section includes interior gypsum board.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product. Samples: Full size Sample in 12 inch long length for each trim accessory indicated.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

pre-consumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

09 29 00-2 GYPSUM BOARD

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. Temple-Inland. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Galvanized or aluminum coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC Bead: J shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L Bead: L shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Use setting type compound for installing paper faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying type, all purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting type, sandable topping compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

B.

C.

3.2

A.

B.

EXAMINATION Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

Comply with ASTM C 840. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E.

3.3

A.

B.

3.4

A.

3.5

A.

Attachment to Wood Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Apply gypsum panels at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to Level 4 according to ASTM C 840:


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

09 91 00- 1 PAINTING

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

1.3

A.

1.4

A.

B.

C.

SUMMARY Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior and interior substrates: ALTERNATES Refer to Section 01 23 00 for description of Alternate No. 3.

DEFINITIONS

Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. 3. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional

colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Owner. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.

09 91 00-2 PAINTING

5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6

A.

B.

C.

1.7

A.

B.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

FIELD CONDITIONS Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of The Sherwin-Williams Company or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Coronado Paint. 3. Duron, Inc. 4. ICI Paints. 5. MAB Paints. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

2.2 PAINT

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed

in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

C. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of

topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 2. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

E. Colors: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

09 91 00-3 PAINTING

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3.2

A.

B.

Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION; GENERAL Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

C. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items

that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

E. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat

as required to produce paint systems indicated.

F. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

H. Shop Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

I. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

09 91 00-4 PAINTING

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

C. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

D. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged

items to match exposed surfaces.

E. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

F. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or

factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

G. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

H. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

I. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

J. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety

and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. c. Metal conduit. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having paintable jacket material. e. Other items as directed by Professional.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Department may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

09 91 00-5 PAINTING

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING

SCHEDULE A. Concrete and CMU

Substrates: 1. Two Prime Coats: Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46. 2. Intermediate and Topcoat: PROMAR 200 Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B31W2200.

B. Concrete and CMU Substrates (E-PNT):

1. Two Prime Coats: Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46. 2. Intermediate and Topcoat: Pro Industrial Hi-Build Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy Low

Luster, B71W100Series/B71V110 Hardener.

C. Steel Substrates: 1. Prime Coat: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 series. 2. Intermediate and Topcoat: PROMAR 200 Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B31W2200.

END OF SECTION

101419-1 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 19

DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast dimensional characters.



B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the

required finishes, in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and of each accessory type.

E.

1.3

A.

B.

1.4

A.

1.5

A.

1.6

A.

Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITIALS Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITIALS

Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products or an entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. b. Allen Markings International. c. APCO Graphics, Inc. d. A. R. K. Ramos Signage Systems. e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. f. Diskey Sign Company. g. Gemini Incorporated. h. Impact Architectural Signage. i. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. j. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg. Co. k. Metallic Arts. I. Seton Identification Products. m. Southwell Company (The).

2. Character Material: Cast aluminum. 3. Character Height: As indicated. 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character. 5. Finishes:

a. Manufacturer's baked enamel or powder coat finish standard, in color as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

b. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked on clear coating. 6. Mounting: Concealed studs.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer

for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, non-corrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of

sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

B. Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects

that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.



A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.


C. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but

before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.


A. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or

irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation. 3. Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,

wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods: 1. Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove

loose debris from hole and substrate surface. 2. Fill holes of substrate with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive.

Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair


procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

10 14 23- 1 PANEL SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 14 23

PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes panel signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

C.

D.

E.

1.4

A.

B.

1.5

A.

1.6

A.

B.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. Samples for Verification: For the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated not less than 12 inches square including border. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


Qualification Data: For Installer. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

10 14 23-2 PANEL SIGNAGE

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. 2. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable prov1s1ons in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 5. APCO Graphics, Inc. 6. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 7. Best Sign Systems Inc. 8. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 9. Fossil Industries, Inc. 10. Gemini Incorporated. 11. Grimco, Inc. 12. lnnerface Sign Systems, Inc. 13. lnPro Corporation 14. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 15. Mills Manufacturing Company. 16. Mohawk Sign Systems. 17. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 18. Seton Identification Products. 19. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 20. Supersine Company (The)

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.048 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.

PANEL SIGNAGE10 14 23-3

5. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with

contrasting colors.

C. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSIA117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

D. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into

panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.

E. Panel Sign Schedule:

1. Room Signs - Room Name or Number: a. Sign Size: 9 inches by 6 inches. b. Character Size: Minimum 1 inch high characters. c. Character Style: Helvetica. d. Copy: Tactile and Braille. e. Colors:

1) Character: White. 2) Background: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

f. Text/Message: As indicated. g. Location: As indicated. h. Room: Provide at each room near door.

2. Toilet Room Signs: a. Sign Size: 6 inches by 7 5/8 inches. b. Character Size: Minimum 1 inch high characters. c. Character Style: Helvetica. d. Copy: Raised. e. Colors:

1) Character: White. 2) Background: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

f. Text/Message: According to requirements in the ADA or of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

g. Location: As indicated. h. Room: Provide at each toilet room.

2.3 PANEL SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Two Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with

adhesive on both sides.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

101423-4 PANEL SIGNAGE

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion

and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall Mounted Signs: Two face tape, mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use

this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

102113-1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 21 13

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

A.

1.2

A.

B.

C.

D.

SUMMARY Solid polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6 inch square

Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

E. Product certificates.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID POLYMER UNITS

A. Recycled Content of Solid Polymer Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Scranton Products

(Santana/Comtec/Capitol), or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 4. Metpar Corp. 5. Sanymetal.

C. Toilet Enclosure Style: Floor-mounted, overhead braced.

D. Urinal Screen Style: Floor anchored.

E. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-

steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or stainless steel.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware

and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency access

and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with anti-

grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant- type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.


2.3 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for

standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,

level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION

10 28 13- 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A Section Includes: 1. Washroom accessories. 2. Shower accessories. 3. Custodial accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

1.4 COORDINATION

A Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

10 28 13-2 TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products specified by model number manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation.

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TP)

1. Model: B-2888. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Operation: Non-control delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 4. Capacity: Double Roll. 5. Materials and Finish:

a. Cabinet, Door, Dispensing Mechanism, Inner Housing and Cam : Stainless steel, exposed surfaces No. 4 finish with tumbler lock keyed like other toilet room accessories.

b. Spindles: High impact ABS.

B. Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTDW): 1. Model: B-38032. 2. Mounting: Semi-Recessed. 3. Capacity:

a. Paper Towel Dispenser: 1100 single fold, 600 C-fold, or 800 multifold. b. Waste Container: Removable 6.3 gallon, stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

4. Materials and Finish: a. Cabinet and Skirt: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish. b. Door: Stainless Steel, No. 4 finish with tumbler lock. c. Waste Container: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

C. Soap Dispenser (SD-1)

1. Model: B-2014. 2. Designed for dispensing liquid or lotion soap. 3. Mounting: Surface. 4. Capacity: 80 oz. 5. Materials and Finish:

a. Shelf: Stainless Steel, No. 4 finish. b. Soap Vessel: Stainless Steel, No. 4 finish. c. Valve: Black molded plastic push button and spout.

6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type.

D. Grab Bars (GB-1, 2, 3, 4):

1. Model: B-5806 Series. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed tamper proof fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge thick, smooth, No. 4 finish. 4. Outside Diameter: 1 1/4 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.


E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (NO): 1. Model: B-254. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler

lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

F. Mirror Unit (M-1) 1. Model : B-1556 2436

2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper, and theft resistant installation, using one piece, galvanized steel, wall hanger device with spring action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

3. Reflective Surface: Stainless Steel No. 8 finish. 4. Size: 24 x 36 inches.

G. Mirror Unit (M-2): 1. Model: B-2906. 2. Frame: Stainless steel channel with corners welded and ground smooth. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper and theft resistant installation, using one piece,

galvanized steel, wall hanger device with spring action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

4. Reflective Surface: Stainless Steel No. 8 finish. 5. Size: 36 x 60 inches.

2.3 SHOWER ACCESSORIES

A. Shower Curtain Rod (SR): 1. Model: B-6107. 2. Description: 1 inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375 inch thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 4. Finish: No. 4.

B. Shower Curtain (SC):

1. Model: 204-2. 2. Size: 42 x 72 inches. 3. Material: 0.008 inch thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem.

C. Shower Curtain Hooks (SCH):

1. Model: 204-1 2. Material: Stainless steel wire 0.09 inch diameter, stainless-steel, spring wire curtain

hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.

D. Folding Shower Seat (FSS): 1. Model: B-1581. 2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access.

3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Engineer.

4. Color: Ivory. 5. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless Steel, No. 4 finish. 6. Dimensions: 33 x 22 inches.


E. Towel Pin (TP): 1. Model: B-6777. 2. Mounting: Concealed wall plate with cap and tamper proof fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge thick, smooth, No.4 finish. 4. Projection From Wall: 3 3/8 inches.

F. Soap Dish (SD-2):

1. Model: B-4390. 2. Description: With washcloth bar. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

2.4 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

specified by model number manufactured by Koala Kare Products, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. Brocar Products, Inc. 4. Diaper Deck & Company, Inc.

B. Diaper Changing Station (DCS): 1. Model: KB110-SSRE. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child

protection strap. Engineered to support a minimum of 250 pound static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Recessed mounted. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, 18 gauge thick exterior finish with antimicrobial, HDPE

interior manufacturer’s standard color. 6. Liner Disperser: Built-in.

2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Utility Shelf With Mop/Broom Holders (UTS): 1. Model: B-239x34. 2. Mounting: Tamper proof screws and fiber plugs or expansion shields. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge thick, smooth, No. 4 finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled.

B. Hang doors and access panels with full length, continuous hinges.

C. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer.

B. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to

ASTM F 446.

END OF SECTION

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS104413-1

SECTION 10 44 13

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITIALS

A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and

procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but not limited to, schedules and coordination requirements.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers

indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1OOBM, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.

104413-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

B. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J. L.

Industries, Inc.; Clear VU Series (semi-recessed) or comparable product by one of the following: a. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. b. Potter Roemer LLC. c. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.

2. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated, provide factory drilled mounting holes. 3. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 4. Semi-recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit

style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with rolled edge exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

5. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 6. Door Material: Steel sheet. 7. Door Style: Full bubble with frame. 8. Door Glazing: Clear, transparent, molded acrylic bubble. 9. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. a. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch. b. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to

open 180 degrees.

C. Accessories: 1. Door Locks: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling

sharply on door handle. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Engineer. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Silk screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

D. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet

type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

B. Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and

coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.





B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.


2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying

with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Color and gloss as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed

cabinets will be installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at 54 inches above finished floor to top

of cabinet.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is

not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.


B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

104416-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

SECTION 10 44 16

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B.

1.3

A.

1.4

A.

1.5

A.

B.

1.6

A.

1.7

A.

Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. COORDINATION Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within six years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 2. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting

104416-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

bracket indicated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by J. L. Industries, Inc. or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Ansul Incorporated. 2. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer LLC.

C. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel.

E. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix Band

bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

F. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A:60B:C, 10 lb nominal capacity, with

monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall

or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

B. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in fire extinguisher cabinets and in compliance

with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb.

END OF SECTION

12 48 16- 1 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

SECTION 12 48 16

ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes recessed foot grilles and frames.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for foot grilles and frames.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Divisions between grille sections. 2. Perimeter floor moldings.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.

1. Foot Grille: 12 inch square assembled sections. 2. Frame Members: 12 inch- long Sample of each type and color.


A. Maintenance Data: For foot grilles and frames to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain foot grilles and frames through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed foot grilles that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." and Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1.


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive foot grilles and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Construction specialties, Inc.; G6 Gridline or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. J. L. Industries, Inc.

12 48 16-2 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

4. Kadee Industries, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H15.

C. Stainless-Steel Angles: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 479/A 479M, corrosion resistant, Type 304.


A. Structural Performance: Provide foot grilles and frames capable of withstanding the following

loads and stresses: 1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Wheel load of 500 lb per wheel.

2.4 FOOT GRILLES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard foot grille assemblies consisting of treads of type and profile

indicated, interlocked or joined together by cross members, and with support legs (if any) and other components needed to produce a complete installation.

B. Stainless-Steel Foot Grille: Type 304.

1. Surface Treads: 0.090 x 0.172 inch wire with 0.145 inch wide openings between wires. 2. Support Rods: Spaced 1 inch o.c., welded to each wire. 3. Pit Grating: 1 1/8 inches deep. 4. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 finish. 5. Grille Size: As indicated.

C. Lockdown: Hidden.

2.5 FRAMES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard frames of size and style for grille type, for permanent recessed installation in subfloor, complete with installation anchorages and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate frame of same material and finish as grilles.

2.6 SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. Drainage Pit Applications: Provide manufacturer's special deep pit frame and support extrusion

system with intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for indicated spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions.

2.7 DRAIN PANS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard, 0.060 inch thick, aluminum sheet drain pan with NPS 2 drain

outlet for each floor grille unit. Coat bottom of pan with protective coating recommended by manufacturer.

12 48 16-3 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate foot grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.

B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum

available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

2.9 FINISHES




PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, size,

minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of foot grilles and frames.

B. Examine roughing-in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before foot grille and frame and drain pan installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed foot grilles and frames and drain pans to comply with manufacturer's written

instructions at locations indicated and with top of foot grilles and frames in relationship to one another and to adjoining finished flooring as recommended by manufacturer. Set foot-grille tops at height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of foot-grille surfaces with doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in foot-

grille recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

16010-1

SECTION 16010ELECTRICAL GENERAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work shall conform to the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC)[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70], the Standard for Electrical Safety inthe Workplace (NFPA 70E), the Life-Safety Code (NFPA 101), the InternationalBuilding Code, the Americans with Disabilities Act, and all other applicable federal,state, and local codes and regulations.

B. All work shall be performed in strict compliance with NFPA 70E. Submission of bidshall stand as an agreement by the Contractor to indemnify and hold harmless theEngineer and Owner from all liability related to damage and/or injury to personnel andequipment during the installation of the project.

C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are intended to convey the intentof the electrical work to be performed on this project. Provide all material, labor,equipment, etc., necessary to provide complete and operable electrical systems.

D. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements,Information to Bidders, and all other parts of this set of Contract Documents arehereby adopted and are applicable to the Division 16000 Contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Visit site prior to bid. Devise a plan for installation of complete and operable electricalsystems meeting the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. Submissionof Bid stands as evidence that the Contractor accepts the Contract Documents assufficient and complete for the work to be performed. Notify the engineer at least twoweeks prior to bid of any discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actualfield conditions. No change orders will be granted due to existing conditions that couldhave been observed during a site visit.

B. Provide temporary power and lighting during construction. Coordinate with theGeneral Contractor for the exact requirements.

C. Electrical switchgear and panelboard layouts are based on sizes of Square Dequipment. Equipment manufactured by General Electric, Siemens, and CutlerHammer are equally acceptable. However, the Electrical Contractor is responsible forselecting and furnishing gear that will fit in the spaces provided and shall beresponsible for arranging the gear to meet the required code clearances. Regardlessof the manufacturer, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a drawn-to-scale electricallayout with the equipment brochures for all rooms in which panelboards, motor controlcenters, switchboards, or switchgear are placed. The drawings shall include the workof all other trades including mechanical system piping, ductwork, sprinkler piping, etc.No conduits shall be installed until layouts have been approved.

16010-2

D. Locate junction boxes, pull boxes, disconnects, and other equipment requiring accessin such a manner that they are accessible at the end of construction. Notify theArchitect where it is impossible to plan conduit routing or equipment placement in sucha manner, and provide the necessary access panels in the ceiling or wall as required.The access panel type and style shall be subject to the Architect’s approval. Employ apainter to provide the appropriate coatings as directed by the Architect.

E. Relocate, or recircuit, all electrical equipment, conduit, and circuitry conflicting with orobstructing work on this project. Where the electrical systems are owned by otherentities, pay them to relocate, or recircuit, their facilities.

F. Arrange for connection of service to all electrical systems by the appropriate utilitycompany. Coordinate completely with all utility company requirements even if they aredifferent than the contract documents. If utility company requirements are differentfrom the contract documents, notify the engineer at least ten days prior to bid. Pay allutility company charges necessary for installation and connection of service. If thecost of the service is unavailable at the time of bid, submit a letter to the GeneralContractor, signed by the appropriate utility company official, stating that the cost hasnot been determined. The General Contractor shall submit this letter with his bid. Thecost will then become the Owner’s responsibility.

G. Provide all necessary equipment, raceway, circuitry, fittings, lugs, terminations, labor,etc. and connect to all equipment and appliances requiring electrical connectionsfurnished herein, by the Owner, or by other Contractors. Prior to ordering electricalequipment and roughing in for equipment furnished by the Owner or other Contractors,verify all connection types, connection locations, connection heights, voltages, numberof phases, conductor sizes, disconnecting means, breaker sizes, etc. Furnish theproper electrical equipment for the equipment actually being supplied.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to beginning work, provide six boundcopies of manufacturers’ cut sheets containing information concerning each article ofelectrical equipment to be furnished on this project. These cut sheets shall containsufficient information to prove compliance with the contract documents. Informationaddressing the requirements of the contract documents shall be highlighted. Eachbound set shall bear the stamp of the Electrical Contractor as well as the GeneralContractor.

B. Within 30 days after award of Contract and prior to beginning work, provide six sets offull size shop drawings showing exact equipment locations with all equipment drawn toscale. Show all raceways with their junction boxes and pull boxes. Show allconnection types, locations, and heights to equipment. Provide mounting and supportdetails for all raceways and equipment. Coordinate with all other trades to ensure thatthere are no conflicts between systems. Each set of shop drawings shall bear thestamp of the Electrical Contractor, the General Contractor, and all Project Sub-Contractors. Failure to submit these Shop Drawings will render the ElectricalContractor responsible for resolving all conflicts between trades at his own expense.

16010-3

C. Submittals and Shop Drawings are reviewed to determine quality of materials.Approval of submittals and shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of meetingthe requirements and intent of the Contract Documents.

D. Outlet, light fixture, and device locations are shown in their approximate locations onthe drawings. Coordinate with Architectural drawings to get final locations. Mount allelectrical outlets shown at counters such that the bottom of the box is two inchesabove the backsplash or six inches above a counter with no backsplash. The Ownerreserves the right to relocate outlets, light fixtures, and devices a distance not toexceed twenty feet prior to the installation of outlet boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical equipment and materials shall be new. All equipment and materials shall bestored on the job site in weatherproof enclosures. Electronic equipment shall be stored infacilities where the temperature and humidity are controlled. In addition, complycompletely with all manufacturers’ requirements for storage and handling.

2.2 All equipment shall be UL listed for the application in which it is used and shall be labeledas evidence of its UL listing.

2.1 Each branch circuit and multiwire branch circuit shall be run with its own neutral conductorcomplying with NEC article 200.4.


3.1 WORKMANSHIP

All work shall be performed with an emphasis on neatness. The Engineer, Architect, andOwner retain the right to reject work that is, in their judgment, unsatisfactory.

3.2 EXPERIENCE

The Contractor shall have completed at least two jobs of similar size and scope within thepast five years. The Engineer reserves the right to reject Contractors based on theirinability to submit evidence of their experience, or based on experience with theContractor on previous projects.

3.3 PERMITS

Obtain and pay for all permits required for work.

3.4 FIREPROOFING

A. Fireproof all penetrations through firewalls with a fireproofing compound listed tomaintain the rating of the wall through which the raceway passes.

B. The firestopping caulk shall be a one-part, intumescent, latex elastomer. The caulkshall be capable of expanding a minimum of 3 times at 1000°F. The material shall be

16010-4

thixotropic and be applicable to overhead, vertical and horizontal firestops. The caulkshall be listed by independent test agencies such as UL or FM and be tested to, andpass the criteria of, ASTM E 814 Fire Test, tested under positive pressure. It shallcomply with the requirements of the NEC (NFPA-70), BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI and NFPACode 101. Firestopping caulk shall be paintable, but shall be non-hardening.Firestopping caulk shall be 3M Firebarrier CP or approved equal.

C. The fireproofing materials shall be installed by individuals certified to perform suchwork. Submit evidence of personnel certifications with electrical equipment brochures.

D. Where cable trays are shown crossing firewalls, terminate the cable tray on each sideof the wall and run the conductors through conduits installed in the wall. Fireproofaround the conductors after installation.

E. Provide mineral wool packing and all other materials recommended by themanufacturer for a complete installation.

3.5 FLASHING

Provide all necessary equipment and flash all roof penetrations in such a manner toensure that all penetrations are completely sealed and all roof warranties remain in effect.Where there are no roof warranties, the Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the electricalpenetrations against leaking for a period of one year from project completion. Employ aprofessional roofing contractor to perform all flashing.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Keep energized equipment covered during all phases of construction. Use enclosures,doors, covers, etc., to ensure that neither personnel nor machinery contact liveelectrical equipment.

B. Replace electrical equipment that is damaged during construction.

3.7 DAMAGED FACILITIES

Locate all existing site equipment and utilities prior to beginning construction. Repair allequipment and utilities damaged during construction, or pay for the repair of theequipment and utilities where required by the Owner of the damaged facilities.

3.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavate in such a manner as to minimize erosion of the soil. Backfill trenches aroundconduits with fine sand that is free of rocks, clods, and debris. Fill sand a minimum of4” over conduits. Backfill the rest of the trench in six inch increments, wetted, andtamped. Final compaction shall be a minimum of 95% of that of the adjacent earth.Resurface the grade with the same material as that excavated from the grade whetherit be paving, concrete, sod, etc. Repair work shall be comparable to the quality of theoriginal site prior to excavation.

B. Provide a 3” wide plastic labeled marker tape 12” below grade over all electricalconduits buried underground. Tapes for power circuits shall have a warning such as

16010-5

“Caution: Buried Electrical Line Below.” Labels on tapes for telephone, data, cabletelevision, and other facilities shall adequately describe the line over which they areburied.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label all switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, disconnects, and motor controlcenters furnished under Division 16000 and other divisions of this contract withengraved rigid plastic nameplates having letters at least ¼ inch high. Nameplatesshall be bolted to the enclosure. All labels shall indicate the voltage, number ofphases, the AIC rating, and the panelboard and circuit number from which the deviceis fed.

B. All circuit breakers in Switchboards, Motor Control Centers, Square DI-Line, and similar panelboards shall be labeled with plastic nameplates (as describedin Part A) providing the name of the load served and the ampacity and number ofpoles of the breaker.

C. All Square D NQ, NF and similar panelboards shall have typewritten circuit directories.

D. Label all conductors at all junction boxes, pull boxes, and terminations with typewrittenadhesive markers indicating the panelboard or switchboard name and circuit numberof the conductor. Labels shall be Brady Datatab or approved equal.

E. Label all junction boxes and pull boxes with stenciled painted letters containing thename of the panelboard and circuit numbers of the circuits contained within. Use blackpaint for normal circuits, red paint for emergency circuits, and orange paint for firealarm circuits. The Contractor may select other colors for junction boxes and pullboxes for auxiliary systems.

F. Label all conduits in the most likely direction of access and view every 50’ and on bothends of each bend with stenciled painted letters containing the name of the panelboardand circuit numbers of the circuits contained within. Use black paint for normalcircuits, red paint for emergency circuits, and orange paint for fire alarm circuits. TheContractor may select other colors for conduits for auxiliary systems.

3.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

Maintain one set of drawings during construction for as-built markings. Mark thesedrawings in red to indicate field changes. Provide these drawings to the Engineer atthe end of the construction process. Where required under the General Conditions,Special Conditions, or other portions of this contract, provide revised computer drawnas-built drawings to the Engineer at the end of construction.

3.11 TESTING

A. A third party testing agency shall be employed as required to test all systems forcompliance with the requirements of all regulatory agencies and these specifications.See the individual specifications and/or the electrical testing specification 16480 forrequirements.

16010-6

B. Provide three bound copies of all test results to the Engineer at the end of theconstruction process. No Recommendation of Substantial Completion will be granteduntil all testing reports have been submitted.

3.12 WARRANTY

Provide the Owner a written guarantee to repair, or replace, all faulty equipment andsystems for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. During this one-year period, a representative of the Contractor shall be on the site actively working onthe repairs within 24 hours of the Owner’s telephone call. During this period of time,the Owner shall not be charged for any repair work or expenses related with the repairwork unless the Contractor can prove that the Owner has damaged the equipment orsystem.

END OF SECTION

16110-1

SECTION 16110RACEWAYS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

All electrical systems circuitry shall be contained in raceways unless expressly listed in thespecification for that system.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all raceways, fittings, couplings, anchors, supports, hangers, etc. forcomplete raceway systems.

B. Except for fire alarm conduit and factory-installed whips on light fixtures, a minimumof 3/4" conduit shall be used for all electrical raceways.

C. Use Fiberglass or Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit for circuits allowedto be run underground, in concrete ductbanks, and in slabs on grade level. ProvideFiberglass or PVC-coated galvanized rigid steel elbows and Fiberglass or PVC-coated galvanized rigid steel conduit for all vertical runs extending to a point at least6” above grade. Galvanized Rigid steel conduit coated with two complete coats ofasphaltum or bituminous paint may be used in lieu of Fiberglass or PVC-coatedgalvanized rigid steel conduit.

D. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit for all applications where circuits are runabove ground and exposed to the weather.

E. Use Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) for all branch circuits, feeders, and auxiliarycircuits requiring conduit 1 ¼” nominal trade size or larger that are run in drylocations.

F. Use Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) for all branch circuits and feeders less than 1¼” nominal trade size that are run in dry locations and in slabs above grade level.

G. Provide final connections to indoor/dry area equipment with flexible metal conduit.

H. Provide final connections to exterior and washdown area equipment with liquid-tightflexible conduit. Exterior applications shall use liquid-tight flexible metallic conduitand washdown area applications shall use liquid-tight flexible non-metallic conduit,type B.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed andapproved for use with 90 degree Celsius conductors. The UL label shall be affixed toeach ten foot length of conduit and each fitting. Conduits shall comply with NEMASpecification TC-2 and UL 651. Fittings shall comply with NEMA TC-3 and UL 514b.

16110-2

2.2 PVC-coated conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed withPVC as the primary corrosion protection. They shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steelconduit with threads electro-galvanized after cutting. The conduit shall meet UL 6. Thefittings shall meet UL 514B. The PVC coating shall be uniformly applied to the interior andexterior of all conduit and fittings. The coating shall be nominally 2 mils thick. The PVCcoating shall extend one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, at every malefitting except unions to fit over the joining female connection. Couplings shall contain aseries of longitudinal ribs, 40 mils in thickness, to protect the coating from damage by toolsduring installation. PVC-coated conduits shall be ETL Verified PVC-001. Fittings shall bemanufactured to the same standard. PVC-coated conduit shall be Robroy Plastibond orapproved equal.

2.3 GRS conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot-dipped galvanized steel. They shall meet the safety standards of UL 6, and shallbe manufactured to ANSI C80.1. Threads shall be hot galvanized after cutting.

2.4 IMC conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot-galvanized steel. Fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be the sameas those for GRS conduit described above. IMC shall meet UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.Threads shall be hot galvanized after cutting. The inside of the conduit shall be finishedwith a corrosion-resistant coating.

2.5 EMT conduits, fittings, couplings, adapters, and accessories shall be UL listed. They shallbe hot galvanized steel and shall be produced in accordance with UL 797 and ANSIC80.3. The inside shall be finished with a corrosion-resistant lubricating coating.

2.6 Conduit fittings used with EMT conduits may be set screw indenter type or compressiontype. All metallic fittings for IMC and Rigid conduit shall be compression type fittings.

2.7 Flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be UL listed ascompliant with UL 1 and UL 1479.

2.8 Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall becoated with a PVC jacket to resist liquids, dirt, grease, and oils. All fittings shall bedesigned, constructed, and installed to maintain the integrity of the liquidtight connections.Liquidtight flexible conduit shall comply with UL 360.

2.9 Liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit (Type B) shall be constructed of a smooth, sunlight& oil resistant, flame retardant, one piece, reinforced thermoplastic PVC jacket. Theoverall installation shall be IP66/67 rated when installed with approved fittings. Theconduit shall be approved for concrete & outdoor use, as well as direct burial applications.


3.1 Conduits run underground shall be buried no less than 24” deep. Services, conduits forprimary conductors, and conduits run under roadways shall be buried no less than 48”deep.

3.2 Do not install conduits in or below ground floor slabs, except for service conduits,site lighting, and where specifically indicated on the drawings.

16110-3

3.3 Do not install conduits within 6” of the deck where a screw down type roof system isutilized.

3.4 PVC-coated conduits may be field-bent provided that manufacturer-approved tools areused. Individuals installing PVC-coated conduits shall be trained for installation by factory-certified trainers. Provide evidence of training with equipment brochures.

3.5 Support and install all conduits per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.Support groups of conduits with electrical strut supported by threaded rods anchored tothe building structure. Supports shall be designed to hold no less than twice the weight ofthe conduit and conductors to be supported plus an additional 250 pounds at midspan.

3.6 All conduits shall be grouped and run parallel to each other and to building walls.

3.7 All conduits shall be assembled according to the Manufacturer’s instructions.

3.8 Conduits run underground shall be assembled to be watertight.

3.9 Cap all conduits during installation. Pull a mandrel sized for that conduit and a cleaningbrush through each conduit before installation of any conductors.

3.10 Conduits that are obviously damaged and field bends that are obviously out of round shallbe replaced.

3.11 Provide final connections to indoor/dry equipment, transformers, and motors with flexiblemetal conduit. Provide final connections to exterior equipment with liquid-tight flexiblemetallic conduit. Provide final connections to process equipment in wash down areas withliquid-tight non-metallic conduit type B.

3.12 Terminate all 1” and smaller conduits entering boxes with a locknut inside the boxand a locknut outside the box. Provide protective bushings on all 1” and smallerconduit threads. Use watertight hubs where conduit terminations are exposed tomoisture.

3.13 Use grounding bushings on all connections of 1-1/4” and larger conduits into outletboxes, junction boxes, metallic enclosures, and panelboards. Grounding bushingsshall also be used on all underground conduits and elsewhere required by theNational Electrical Code.

3.14 Conduits shall be run no closer than 12” to hot water pipes.

3.15 Where conduits are run through the ceiling and are required to make connections toequipment within the room that is not located near a wall, support the conduit from thestructural ceiling and provide a flange bolted to the floor. Install a tee conduit fitting in thevertical run of conduit, and make the connection to the equipment with a piece of flexibleconduit extending from the tee conduit fitting to the equipment.

3.16 Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. Providegrounding jumpers between the conduits.

16110-4

3.17 Provide EMT conduit sleeves where conduits pass through walls, floors, or footings sizeda minimum of two nominal trade sizes larger than the conduit that must pass through thesleeve.

3.1 Equip all empty conduits with a pullwire or string capable of withstanding 500 pounds ofpulling tension.

END OF SECTION

16150-1

SECTION 16150OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all outlet boxes and junction boxes in accordance with this specificationand the requirements of the NEC.

1.2 Provide outlet boxes for all switches, receptacles, luminaires, telephone jacks, cable jacks,and other devices furnished in this Contract. Provide all necessary hardware including,but not limited to, additional structural support, support brackets, screws, bolts, fixturestuds, etc.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be manufactured by Raco, Steel City, Crouse Hinds, orAppleton.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Concealed Outlet boxes and junction boxes in dry locations shall be galvanizedstamped steel boxes sized per the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC),but no less than 4” x 4” x 2 1/8” deep (Raco #231 or equal). The thickness of the steelshall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC. Provide stamped steelcovers for all junction boxes manufactured to fit the particular box on which it is used.

A. Exposed Outlet boxes in dry locations shall be heavy duty, deep, die cast aluminumdevice boxes (Perfect Line “T” or “LT” series or approved equal) with appropriatecoverplates.

B. Outlet boxes used in concrete and masonry walls and ceilings shall be of the concretetype manufactured for such applications.

C. Outlet boxes and junction boxes in wet locations shall be of cast metal constructionwith gasketed waterproof covers. All conduit connections to the boxes shall be madewatertight.

D. Wall outlet boxes shall be 4” x 4” x 2 1/8” (Raco #231 or equal), or larger as required,with plaster rings provided for final flush installation. Plaster rings shall have single-gang openings unless the equipment mounted inside requires two-gang installation.

E. Floor boxes in slabs on grade shall be deep rectangular, cast iron, fully adjustableboxes with brass rings. Covers shall be made of brass and shall provide flip topaccess to the power or data jacks inside. Screw-on covers are not acceptable unlessa flip-top cover is unavailable for the device installed in the floor box. Provide the boxsized as required for the number of devices shown installed. Boxes shall be asfollows, or approved equal:

16150-2

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B24362. Single-Gang Cover Plates: Hubbell S38253. Double-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B42334. Double-Gang Cover Plates: Two Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates5. Triple-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B43336. Triple-Gang Cover Plates: Three Hubbell S3825 Cover Plates

In slabs above grade, use cast iron, semi-adjustable shallow boxes as follows, orapproved equal:

1. Single-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B24142. Two-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B42143. Three-Gang Boxes: Hubbell B4314

Receptacles installed in floor boxes shall be as described in Specification 16460,Switches and Receptacles. Data, Telephone, or Combination Data and TelephoneOutlets shall consist of Category 5 rated RJ45 jacks mounted in a Hubbell DJOI strapfor use under a S3825 flip top cover plate.

In existing slabs above grade, use poke thru boxes as follows, or equal:

1. Hubbell System One

F. Size all boxes per the requirements of the latest NEC.


3.1 All devices shall be flush mounted unless specific written permission is obtained from theEngineer for a particular device in a particular location.

3.2 Install outlet boxes in walls, and provide plaster rings such that wall finish contractor’s finishis flush against the edge of the plaster ring. Workmanship will not be accepted where thehole in the wall shows behind the cover plate, or the wall finish is uneven or unpainted at theedge of the cover plate.

3.3 Use round or square ceiling outlet boxes as required for the device being installed. Theceiling shall be finished flush against the box; the fixture shall completely cover the boxand mount tight against the ceiling. Coordinate the requirements of the fixture prior toinstalling the box.

3.4 Provide junction boxes, pull boxes, and conduit fittings where required by the NEC to limitthe number of bends in the raceway, and where required to prevent damage to conductorsdue to long runs.

3.5 Junction boxes and pull boxes installed in the ground outside shall be QuaziteComposolite or approved equal. Mount the boxes over 24” of washed gravel fill. If splicesare to be made inside the boxes, the boxes shall be of the type furnished with a bottom,and all conduit connections shall be watertight. In addition, all conductor splices shall bemade watertight using an appropriate splice kit as manufactured by 3M, or an approvedequal.

16150-3

END OF SECTION

16250-1

SECTION 16250GROUNDING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Ground all equipment, systems, structures, etc., per the latest edition of the NationalElectrical Code (NEC). The overall, installed grounding electrode system shall havea resistance to earth of 5 ohms or less.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Use mechanical bolted connections in dry locations that are accessible.

2.2 Use exothermic welds in wet locations and locations that will be inaccessible at the end ofconstruction.

2.3 Ground rods shall be UL 467 listed 3/4” x 10’ copper-clad steel ground rods with aminimum copper cladding thickness of 10 mils.

2.4 All above grade grounding conductors shall have Type THW insulation, or equivalent, withgreen insulation.

2.5 All below grade grounding electrode conductors shall be bare or shall be colored green forits entire exposed length.

2.6 All loadcenters, panelboards, switchboards, transformers, enclosed circuit breakers,disconnects, control cabinets, etc. shall be provided with factory installed ground barssuitable for the size and quantity of grounding conductors terminating or originating fromthe device.

PART 3 – EMBEDDED GROUNDING

3.1 All ground wire shall be soft or medium drawn Class B stranded copper with cable sizeand insulation as shown on the drawings.

3.2 The minimum size conductor to be used on main grounding circuits shall be #2/0 AWG.The minimum size conductor to be used on any part of the embedded grounding systemshall be #6 AWG.

3.3 All underground connections shall be made using an exothermic welding process.

3.4 At the point of attachment of all grounding connections, the surface shall be cleaned of allpaint, oil, and grease and shall be dressed to bright metal to insure electrical continuity.

3.5 The minimum allowable depth of ground cable below permanent grade is 30 inchesunless noted otherwise.

3.6 Where underground conductors are brought above grade, each conductor shall beenclosed in Sch. 40 PVC conduit and appropriately secured.

16250-2

3.7 All completed grounding connections shall be cleaned and coated with insulating paint.

3.8 All new ground grids shall be connected to any existing nearby ground grids and to theground conductors in any duct banks that terminate within the ground grid.


4.1 Ground rods shall be installed with their tops no less than 12” below grade. Providesupplemental ground rods (in addition to the number of ground rods shown on thegrounding detail), as required, to bring the overall resistance to earth to 5 ohms or less.Supplemental ground rods shall be installed a minimum of 8' apart.

4.2 Bond ground connections to metal raceways at each end of the conduit run. Providegrounding bushings where required by the NEC. Where ladder cable trays are used,bond the ground conductor to each section & fitting of the tray and to the building powersystem ground. Where wiremesh cable trays are used, provide a continuous #6 groundwire bonded to each cable tray section and to the building power system ground.

4.3 Foundation reinforcing bars shall be bonded to the ground grid using a connector ULlisted for the application.

4.4 Bond the secondary neutral to ground on all step down transformers and all separatelyderived systems per NEC article 250.

4.5 Provide all circuits with an equipment grounding conductor sized per the NEC, or asshown on the drawings. Circuitry shown on drawings does not include the requiredequipment grounding conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be furnishedwith green insulation for conductors #8 AWG and smaller; where larger than #8, theequipment grounding conductor shall be taped green for its entire exposed length.

4.6 Individual ground conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit sized per the NEC.

4.7 Provide receptacles, luminaires, and other devices with a green conductor that bonds thereceptacle grounding screw or pigtail, the outlet box grounding screw, and the equipmentgrounding conductor together.

4.8 All boxes, enclosures, and electrical equipment shall be bonded to ground with a groundconductor sized per NEC.

4.9 In health care facilities, where two or more different panelboards serve the same patient-care area, a #6 AWG insulated continuous copper conductor shall bond these differentpanelboards together.

4.10 Telephone, cable television, and other auxiliary systems shall be bonded to the electricalbuilding service ground using a conductor no smaller than #1/0 AWG. See the exactgrounding requirements in each system’s specification.

4.11 All SPD’s shall be bonded to ground per the Manufacturer’s installation instructions and/orthe latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

16250-3

END OF SECTION

16410-1

SECTION 16410600V CONDUCTORS

PART 1 – GENERAL

Provide all circuitry, terminations, splices, connectors, lugs, and other equipment necessary forconnection of all equipment requiring electrical connections.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 All electrical conductors shall be soft-drawn annealed copper having 98% conductivity andan insulation rating of 600V.

2.2 Conductors shall be UL listed for installation in the raceway in which they are to beinstalled.

2.3 Conductors shall be rated 90 degrees C for use in residential, commercial, industrial, andinstitutional facilities, and shall be listed as 105 degrees C appliance wire. Conductorsshall be listed under UL 83, UL 1063, and UL 758. If XLP or EPR insulation is used,conductors shall be listed under UL 44 and NEMA WC7.

2.4 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run in drylocations shall have PVC insulation and a Nylon outer jacket. They shall be THHN/THWNor XHHW-2.

2.5 Conductors used for branch circuits, feeders, auxiliary systems, and controls run inwet locations (i.e. circuits run underground, etc.) shall have XLP or EPR insulationand be type XHHW-2.

2.6 Conductors used for services shall be type SE for aerial services or type USE-2 forunderground services.

2.7 All conductors shall be stranded, unless noted otherwise. Use ring tongue terminals orspade lugs for connections to terminal screws.

2.8 Use minimum #14 AWG conductors for controls and auxiliary circuits. Use largerconductors as required to compensate for voltage drops exceeding 3% of the systemvoltage.

2.9 Conductors shall be furnished in the colors described below unless local ordinancesrequire different colors. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be furnished with coloredinsulation; conductors larger than #8 shall be taped with the appropriately colored tape fora length of at least 2” at each panelboard, junction box, pull box, load, or other exposedlocation. Ground conductors shall be taped green for their entire exposed length.

SystemVoltage 208Y/120V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire

Phase A BlackPhase B RedPhase C BlueNeutral WhiteGround Green

16410-2


3.1 Install conductors carefully using a minimum of two tradesmen – one feeding theconductors into the conduit, and the other pulling the conductors into the conduit.

3.2 Splices shall only be used for making taps in conductor runs – not for pull throughconductors. Conductors shall be continuous from source to load unless specificallypermitted in writing by the engineer for a particular application.

3.3 Splices shall only be made in approved enclosures. Splices shall not be pulled insideconduits.

3.4 Each branch circuit and multiwire branch circuit shall be run with its own neutralconductor.

3.5 Join stranded conductors with appropriate mechanical or compression lugs. Wire nutsmay be used for solid conductors only. Control conductors shall be terminated or splicedon appropriately labeled terminal blocks.

3.6 Provide cable supports and strain relief connectors as required by the NEC.

3.7 Furnish junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes, manholes, etc. as required to ensure thatthe maximum number of bends allowed by the NEC are not exceeded and to ensure thatthe cables are not damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

16420-1

SECTION 16420PANELBOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all panelboards, complete with their circuit breakers, phase buses,neutral buses, ground buses, structural supports, and other equipment necessary forcomplete systems.

1.2 The Electrical Gear Manufacturer shall perform a Protective Device Coordinationand Arc Flash Study as detailed in Specification 16470.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Panelboards shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliance withNEMA PB 1, UL 50, UL 67, UL 489, NFPA 70, and the ASTM.

B. Circuit breakers shall be designed, manufactured, and tested to be in compliancewith NEMA AB 1, UL 489, and Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN.

C. Panelboards shall be UL listed for service entrance where used for that purpose.

D. Panelboard ampere interrupting current (AIC) ratings shall equal the lowest rateddevice in the panelboard. Provide panelboards with the AIC ratings shown on theContract Drawings. Buses shall be braced to withstand the AIC rating shown on thedrawings. Series ratings shall only be used where shown on the panelboardschedules.

E. All panelboards shall be furnished with dead-front, door-in-door construction.

F. All panelboards shall be provided with factory installed ground bars suitable for thesize and quantity of grounding conductors terminating and/or originating from thepanel.

G. Lug locations shall be determined during the creation of shop drawings for properarrangement with the raceway system.

H. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper or equivalently ratedaluminum.

I. Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 1 when they are to be mounted indoors, andNEMA 3R when they are to be mounted outdoors. Provide special enclosures whereshown on the Contract Drawings.


Panelboards shall be manufactured by Siemens, Square D, General Electric, or Eaton.

2.3 PANELBOARD CLASSES

16420-2

A. Power distribution panelboards shall be available with mains and branch devices upto 1200 amperes. AIC ratings shall be available up to 200,000 Amperes. Powerdistribution panelboards shall be equipped with a nameplate containing theappropriate system voltage, number of wires, and number of phases for the systemon which they are installed.

B. In 480Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 600 Amperesis required, the AIC rating does not exceed 65,000 Amperes, and no branchbreakers exceed 125Amperes, Square D NF and equivalent panelboards may beused.

C. In 480Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 225 Amperesis required, the AIC rating does not exceed 14,000 Amperes, and no branchbreakers exceed 100Amperes, Square D NEHB and equivalent panelboards may beused.

D. In 240Vac and less applications where a main breaker not exceeding 400 Amperesor main lugs not exceeding 600 Amperes is required, the AIC rating does not exceed22,000 Amperes, and no branch breakers exceed 125 Amperes, Square D NQODand equivalent panelboards may be used.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. All circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case type breakers with quick-make, quick-break contact action, unless noted to be furnished with electronic tripunits.

B. Thermal Magnetic type circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trippingelements on each pole. Breakers with multiple poles shall have common tripping ofall poles. Circuit breaker ampere ratings shall be stamped on the handle.Interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be equivalent to the specified AICrating of the panelboard. Breakers handles shall reside in a position between “ON”and “OFF” after a trip condition. Breakers shall be rated HACR when used forheating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration; HID when used with High IntensityDischarge fixtures; and shall be rated SWD when used for switching duty.

C. Electronic Trip Units shall have the following features: long time pickup, long timedelay, short time pickup, short time delay, and instantaneous settings.

D. Circuit breaker sizes for motor loads are based on Square D recommendations foruse of their breakers at the motor horsepowers listed on the mechanical drawings. Ifequipment is used other than Square D, adjust breaker sizes per the manufacturer’srecommendations.

E. Circuit breakers with slash ratings, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall be used insolidly grounded systems where the nominal voltage of any conductor to grounddoes not exceed the lower of the two values of the breaker’s voltage rating and thenominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value ofthe circuit breaker’s voltage rating.

16420-3

F. Circuit breakers with straight voltage ratings, such as 240V or 480V, shall be used insystems other than solidly grounded systems (Corner-Grounded Delta, Ungrounded,Impedance Grounded, etc.) where the nominal voltage between any two conductorsdoes not exceed the circuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shallnot be used to protect a three-phase, Corner-Grounded Delta system unless thecircuit breaker is marked 1Ф-3Ф.


3.1 Install panelboards in complete compliance with all Manufacturers’ installation instructions.

3.2 Install conductors neatly in panelboards. Group and tie-wrap circuits that share a commonneutral.

3.3 All panelboards shall have typewritten circuit directories.

3.4 Number circuits exactly as shown on the contract drawings.

3.5 Panelboards shall be labeled with a three line black phenolic nameplate with white corewith 1/4" high letters. Nameplate shall identify panel and voltage, i.e., "Panel LA","480Y/277V, 3ф, 4W", "Fed from MDP".

3.6 Install Arc-Flash and Available Fault Current Labels on each Panelboard as detailedin the label detail in the construction drawings and in Specification 16470.

3.7 Any panels that are floor mounted shall be provided with a 4” thick concrete housekeepingpad that extends 3-1/2” around all edges of the panel. Provide 1”, 45 degree chamferededges.

3.8 Where panelboards are flush-mounted, provide one ¾” spare conduit to above theaccessible ceiling for every three available circuits not being used, but no less than two ¾”spare conduits per panelboard.

END OF SECTION

16430-1

SECTION 16430DISCONNECTS & SEPARATELY-MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install all disconnects and separately mounted circuit breakers as shown onthe drawings, specified herein, and required by the NEC.

1.2 The Electrical Gear Manufacturer shall perform a Protective Device Coordinationand Arc Flash Study as detailed in Specification 16470.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Disconnects shall be of the heavy-duty type, and shall be UL listed for serviceentrance use. They shall meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA Standard KS1.Provide fuses sized to appropriately protect the load served. Equipmentmanufacturer’s recommendations shall take precedence over the Contract Drawings.

B. Fuses shall be dual element, time-delay, Class J fuses. They shall be BussmanLow-Peak or approved equal.

C. All disconnects and enclosed circuit breakers shall be provided with factory installedground bars suitable for the size and quantity of grounding conductors terminatingand/or originating from the device.

D. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded-case with quick-make, quick-break contact action, unless noted otherwise. They shall have thermal and magnetictripping elements on each pole. Breakers with multiple poles shall have commontripping of all poles. Circuit breaker ampere ratings shall be stamped on the handle.Interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be equivalent to the specified AICrating of the panelboard. Breakers handles shall reside in a position between “ON”and “OFF” after a trip condition. Breakers shall be rated HACR when used forheating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration; HID when used with High IntensityDischarge fixtures; and shall be rated SWD when used for switching duty.

E. Circuit breaker sizes for motor loads are based on Square D recommendations foruse of their breakers at the motor horsepowers listed on the mechanical drawings. Ifequipment is used other than Square D, adjust breaker sizes per the manufacturer’srecommendations.

F. Circuit breakers with slash ratings, such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall be used insolidly grounded systems where the nominal voltage of any conductor to grounddoes not exceed the lower of the two values of the breaker’s voltage rating and thenominal voltage between any two conductors does not exceed the higher value ofthe circuit breaker’s voltage rating.

G. Circuit breakers with straight voltage ratings, such as 240V or 480V, shall be used insystems other than solidly grounded systems (Corner-Grounded Delta, Ungrounded,Impedance Grounded, etc.) where the nominal voltage between any two conductors

16430-2

does not exceed the circuit breaker’s voltage rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shallnot be used to protect a three-phase, Corner-Grounded Delta system unless thecircuit breaker is marked 1Ф-3Ф.

H. Disconnect and individually-mounted circuit breaker ampere interrupting current(AIC) ratings shall equal the rating of the panelboard from which they are fed unlessotherwise noted.

I. Buses shall be constructed of 98% conductivity copper or equivalently ratedaluminum.

J. Switches shall be horsepower rated where used to serve motors.

K. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 when they are to be mounted indoors, NEMA 3R whenthey are to be mounted outdoors, and NEMA 4X where they are subject towashdown. Provide special enclosures where shown on the Contract Drawings.


Disconnects and separately-mounted circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Siemens,Square D, General Electric, or Eaton.


3.1 Install disconnects and individually-mounted circuit breakers in complete compliance withall manufacturers’ installation instructions. Where necessary, provide structural supportsand bracing for installation.

3.2 Disconnects are to be surface-mounted.

3.3 Install Arc-Flash and Available Fault Current Labels on each Disconnect andSeparately-Mounted Circuit Breaker as detailed in the label detail in theconstruction drawings and in Specification 16470.

3.4 Individually-mounted circuit breakers are to be flush-mounted unless otherwise shown.

END OF SECTION

16447-1

SECTION 16447GENERATOR SET

1. Scope of Work

1.1. It is the intent of this specification to secure an engine-driven generator set that hasbeen prototype tested, factory built, production-tested, and site-tested together withall accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans anddrawings and specified herein.

1.2. Any and all exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to theapproval of the engineer.

1.3. The power system shall be furnished by a single Manufacturer who shall beresponsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. Theentire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, andspecifications herein.

1.4. The equipment shall be produced by a Manufacturer who has produced this type ofequipment for a period of at least 15 years and who maintains a serviceorganization available twenty-four hours a day throughout the year.

1.5. The equipment shall be produced by a Manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified forthe design, development, production and service of its complete product line.

1.6. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, 300 gallons of dieselfuel, and equipment to provide a complete and workable emergency powersystem as shown on the drawings and specifications herein.

2. General Requirements

2.1. It is the intent of this specification to secure a generator set system that has beentested during design verification, in production, and at the final job site. Thegenerator set will be a commercial design and will be complete with all of thenecessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings,and specifications herein. The equipment supplied shall meet the requirements ofthe National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and regulations.

2.2. All equipment shall be new and of current production by a national firm thatmanufactures the generator sets and controls, transfer switches, switchgear, andassembles the generator sets as a complete and coordinated system. There will beone-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a localrepresentative with factory-trained servicemen.

3. Submittal

16447-2

3.1. The submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheetsshowing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied; schematic wiringdiagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying byterminal number each required interconnection between the generator set, thetransfer switches, and the remote annunciator panel.

4. Codes and Standards

4.1. The generator set shall be listed in accordance to UL 2200 or submitted to anindependent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.

4.2. The generator set shall conform to the requirements of the following codes andstandards:

4.2.1. CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment.

4.2.2. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility-Generic ImmunityRequirements, Part 2: Industrial.

4.2.3. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio InterferenceCharacteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment.

4.2.4. IEC8528 part 4, Control Systems for Generator Sets.

4.2.5. IEC Std 61000-2 and 61000-3 for susceptibility, 61000-6 radiated andconducted electromagnetic emissions.

4.2.6. IEEE446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby PowerSystems for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

4.2.7. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Equipment shall be suitable for usein systems in compliance to Article 700.

4.2.8. NFPA 99, Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities.

4.2.9. NFPA 110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator setshall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1 prototype testsrequired by this standard shall have been performed on a complete andfunctional unit. Component level type tests will not substitute for thisrequirement.

4.2.10. IBC 2702.1, International Building Code Emergency and Standby Power

16447-3

Systems.

5. Testing

5.1. To ensure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliabilityand quality standards, the manufacturer and/or local representative shall beresponsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests,and site tests.

5.2. Design Prototype Tests. Components of the emergency system, such as theengine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories, shall not be subjected toprototype tests because the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar designprototypes and preproduction models shall be subject to the following tests:

5.2.1. Maximum power (kW).

5.2.2. Maximum motor starting (kVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip.

5.2.3. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and/or byresistance method per NEMA MG1-32.6.

5.2.4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions.

5.2.5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response.

5.2.6. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influencefactor.

5.2.7. Three-phase short circuit tests.

5.2.8. Alternator cooling air flow.

5.2.9. Torsional analysis to verify that the generator set is free of harmfultorsional stresses.

5.2.10. Endurance testing.

5.3. Final Production Tests. Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads withguards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include:

5.3.1. Single-step load pickup

16447-4

5.3.2. Safety shutdown device testing

5.3.3. Rated Power @ 0.8 PF

5.3.4. Maximum power

5.3.5. Upon request, a witness test, or a certified test record sent prior toshipment.

5.4. Site Tests. The Manufacturer's Distribution Representative shall perform aninstallation check, startup, and 4 hour building load test. The Engineer, regularOperators, and the Maintenance Staff shall be notified of the time and date of thesite test. The tests shall include:

5.4.1. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to theManufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditionspresent and expected.

5.4.2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall bechecked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: blockheaters, battery chargers, alternator strip heaters, remote annunciators,etc.

5.4.3. Generator set startup under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, pathof exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement duringstarting and stopping, vibration during operation, normal and emergencyline-to-line voltage and frequency, and phase rotation.

5.4.4. Automatic start by means of a simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting, transfer of the entire building load, and automaticshutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjustedfor proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oilpressure, and battery charge level along with generator set voltage,amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the 4 hour test.

6. Warranty and Maintenance

6.1. The generator set shall include a standard one year warranty to guarantee againstdefective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer'spublished warranty from date of startup. Optional warranties shall be availableupon request.

6.2. The generator set Manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 24-hour partsand service organization. This organization shall regularly engage in maintenance

16447-5

contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipmentsimilar to that specified. A service agreement shall be available and shall includesystem operation under simulated operating conditions; adjustment to thegenerator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certificationin the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and function tests performed on allsystems.

7. Equipment

7.1. The generator set shall provide 150kW/188 kVA when operating at 120/208 volts,three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, .8 power factor. The generator set shall be capable ofa Standby 125°C rating while operating in an ambient condition of less than orequal to 104°F and a maximum elevation of 3279 feet above sea level.

7.2. Motor starting performance and voltage dip determinations shall be based on thecomplete generator set. The generator set shall be capable of supplying 920 SKVAfor starting motor loads at a 90% sustained voltage or an equivalent rating for amaximum instantaneous voltage dip of 30%. Motor starting performance andvoltage dip determination that does not account for all components affecting totalvoltage dip i.e. engine, alternator, voltage regulator and governor will not beacceptable. As such, the generator set shall be prototype tested to optimize anddetermine performance as a generator set system.

7.3. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-alternator and heavy-dutysteel base.

8. Engine

8.1. The 6 cylinder engine shall deliver a minimum of 320 HP at a governed enginespeed of 1800 rpm, and shall be equipped with the following:

8.1.1. Electronic isochronous governor capable of 0.25% steady-statefrequency regulation.

8.1.2. 12 or 24 volt positive-engagement solenoid shift-starting motor.

8.1.3. 30-ampere automatic battery charging alternator with a solid-statevoltage regulation.

8.1.4. Positive displacement, full-pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oilfilters, dipstick, and oil drain.

8.1.5. Dry-type replaceable air cleaner elements for normal applications.

8.1.6. Engine-driven or electric fuel-transfer pump including fuel filter and

16447-6

electric solenoid fuel shutoff valve capable of lifting fuel.

8.2. The turbocharged engine shall be fueled by diesel.

8.3. The engine shall have 6 cylinders and be liquid-cooled by a unit-mounted radiator122°F/50°C.

8.4. The engine shall be EPA certified from the factory.

9. Alternator

9.1. The alternator shall be salient-pole, brushless, 2/3-pitch, 10 lead, self-ventilated with drip-proof construction and amortisseur rotor windings andskewed for smooth voltage waveform. The ratings shall meet the NEMA standard(MG1-32.40) temperature rise limits. The insulation shall be class H per UL1446and the varnish shall be a fungus resistant epoxy. Temperature rise of the rotorand stator shall be limited to Standby 130°C. The excitation system shall be ofbrushless construction controlled by a solid- state voltage regulator capable ofmaintaining voltage within ±.25%% at any constant load from 0% to 100% of rating.The AVR shall be capable of proper operation under severe nonlinear loads andprovide individual adjustments for voltage range, stability and volts-per-hertzoperations. The AVR shall be protected from the environment by conformalcoating. The waveform harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5% total RMSmeasured line-to-line at full rated load. The TIF factor shall not exceed 50.

9.2. The alternator shall have a single maintenance-free bearing, designed for 40000hour B10 life. The alternator shall be directly connected to the flywheel housingwith a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel.

9.3. The generator shall be inherently capable of sustaining at least 250% of ratedcurrent for at least 10 seconds under a 3-phase symmetrical short circuit withoutthe addition of separate current-support devices.

10. Controller

10.1. The controller shall be fully electronic and provide total genset system integration.

10.1.1. The generator set controller shall meet NFPA 110 Level 1 requirements(2010 Edition) and shall include an integral alarm horn as required byNFPA.

10.1.2. The controller shall meet NFPA 99 and NEC requirements.

10.1.3. The controller shall be UL 508 listed.

16447-7

10.2. ATS Control

As a standard feature the genset controller will have an integrated automatic transferswitch control to allow the genset to monitor the primary power source and automaticallystart the genset and transfer loads to the genset if the primary source of power getsoutside of acceptable voltage and/or frequency levels. Once the primary source ofpower is returned to normal and stabilized for a period of time, the load will beautomatically transferred back to the primary power source.

10.3. Hardware Requirements

The genset controller shall provide protection for the engine and generator as well asthe loads connected to the generator. There shall be protection that is easilyadjustable by the user with threshold settings and time delays as required toadequately protect the genset and connected loads. All functions of the protectionpackage shall be programmable and selectable in the programmable logic portion ofthe PC software for implementing in to a larger system level control scheme. Theengine shall have the following protection offering:

10.3.1. Loss of engine sendersHigh Coolant TempEngine OverspeedLow Oil PressureLow Fuel Level

10.4. The engine protection scheme must also allow for warnings to be annunciated tothe operator. These shall include all of the engine protection noted above and inaddition to those it must provide for

10.4.1. High Fuel Level Low Fuel LevelLow Battery Voltage High Battery VoltageWeak Battery Maintenance TimeHigh Coolant Temp Low Coolant TempLow Oil Pressure Coolant LevelECU Comms Failure Active DTCs from the ECU3kW Overload Thresholds

10.4.2. The generator protection shall provide for multiple setpoints and timedelays. The generator protection package shall work in conjunction withthe genset control portion and adequately protect the generator while beingsecure enough to not cause false tripping under normal generatoroperation during start up and shutdown. This will include under frequencyinhibits for the under voltage protection and voltage inhibits for the underfrequency protection.

16447-8

All protection functions shall be enabled by the user and shall be annunciatedvia the front panel LCD, the USB port and the PC software, and the RS485Modbus communications.

10.4.3. The unit shall have an event log for recording alarms, pre-alarms, engine start-ups, engine shutdowns, modem dial out attempts, ATS contact inputs and otherentries to assist in the troubleshooting and maintenance of the genset. Thereshall be 30 entry items and each item should record the time/date and engine runhours of the first occurrence the last occurrence and it shall have an occurrencecount. In addition, each record shall contain details of the time, date and enginerun hours for the most recent 30 occurrences of that event. Since detailedinformation is retained for the most recent 30 occurrences for each event recordand there are 30 event records up to 900 specific events shall be recorded. Theevent log shall be viewable from the front panel or via the PC software. The PCsoftware will allow the user to sort the entries based on the entry type, the first orlast occurrence date or time, or the occurrence count. The PC software will alsoallow the user to download an event file in CSV format in to an Excelspreadsheet.

10.4.4. The genset controller shall monitor the engine and generator portion ofthe genset. It shall also monitor the bus input sufficiently to indicate thestatus of the bus. The genset controller shall monitor the followingengine parameters:

Oil Pressure Coolant TemperatureRPM Engine Run TimeBattery Voltage Fuel LevelHours Till Maintenance is DueVarious parameters available from the engine’s ECU via J1939

10.4.5. The genset controller shall monitor the following generator parameters:

RMS Voltage L-L RMS Voltage L-NRMS Current FrequencyReal Power (kW) L-L Real Power (kW) TotalApparent Power (kVA) Total VARsKilowatt Hours Power Factor

10.4.6. The genset controller shall monitor the following bus parameters:

RMS VoltageFrequency

10.4.7. Output for shedding of loads if the genset reaches a user programmablepercentage of its kW rating. Load shed shall also be enabled if thegenerator set output frequency falls below59 Hz.

16447-9

10.4.8. Contact Inputs

The genset controller shall have 12 contact inputs. One of the inputs shall bededicated to the Emergency stop function in order to comply with NFPA110 andthe other 11 inputs shall be programmable and selectable in the programmablelogic portion of the PC software.

10.4.9. Contact Outputs

The genset controller shall have 7 contact outputs as standard. There shall bethree (3), 30Adc rated contacts and four (4) 2 Adc rated contacts with an optionfor eight (8) additional 2Adc rated contact outputs. The three 30A rated contactsshall be assigned the functions of crank control, fuel solenoid control and glowplug (pre-start) control. The use of solid state outputs is not acceptable. Eachcontact output shall be programmable and selectable in the programmable logicportion of the PC software.

10.5 PC Software Programming

It will be the responsibility of the generator provider to program theprogrammable input and output contacts.

10.6. Communications

Because the genset may need to be incorporated in to a broadercommunications network it needs to have communication capability for USB,RS485 (optional) using MODBUS, an internal industrial grade Modem (optional)with dial out and dial in capability, SAE J1939 engine ECU capability (includingMTU ADEC, MTU-ECU7 and MTU MDEC Module Type 304 metering) andRS485 for providing communications to a remote display panel for NFPA-110indication.

11. Accessories

11.1. Battery Charger: A 10-ampere automatic float to equalize battery charger with thefollowing features:

1. 12 or 24 VDC output2. Voltage regulation of 1% from no to full load over 10% AC input line voltage

variations3. Ammeter and voltmeter with 5% full-scale accuracy4. LED lamp for power indication5. Current limited during engine cranking, short circuit, and reverse polarity

conditions6. Temperature compensated for ambient temperatures for -40°C to 60°C7. UL Listed

11.2. Battery Rack and Cables: Battery rack and battery cables capable of holding the

16447-10

manufacturer's recommended batteries shall be supplied.

11.3. Block Heater: The block heater (120V) shall be thermostatically controlled andsized to maintain Manufacturers recommended engine coolant temperature tomeet the start-up requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 110, Level 1.

11.4 Alternator Strip Heater: The alternator strip heater (120V) shall be thermostaticallycontrolled and sized to maintain the Manufacturer’s recommended alternatorwinding temperature. The alternator strip heater shall run when the genset is non-operational to keep moisture/condensation from building up in the alternatorwindings/housing.

11.5. Critical Silencer: The engine exhaust silencer shall be temperature and rustresistant, and rated for critical applications. The silencer will reduce total engineexhaust noise by 25-35 db(A).

11.6 Ground Fault Indicator: A ground-fault sensing device shall be located at, orahead of, the line circuit breaker. The device shall provide ground-faultindication only.

11.7. Line Circuit Breaker: The generator shall come with a factory installed, 100% rated,400 amperes (22kAIC rated) that is UL2200 listed. Load side lugs shall be providedfrom the factory. The line circuit breaker shall include auxiliary contacts, shunt trip,undervoltage trip, alarm switch, and overcurrent switch functionality. Load sidebreaker connections made at the factory shall be separated from field connections.When GFI breakers are required, additional neutrals shall be factory installed.

11.8. Crankcase Emission Canister: The engine shall have a crankcase emissioncanister. The emission canister prevents crankcase oil vapor from escaping intothe air to prevent environmental pollution and fouling of the radiator.

11.9. Flex Exhaust Tube: The exhaust piping shall be gas proof, seamless, stainlesssteel, flexible exhaust bellows with threaded NPT connection.

11.10. Flexible Fuel Lines: The two fuel lines shall have fittings for the engine inlet/returnand threaded pipe fittings for connection to the subbase fuel tank (or stationarypiping).

11.11. Pre-alarm Senders: The generator prealarm senders shall provide signals for localand/or remote annunciation for engine conditions approaching critical/shutdownparameters required in NFPA 110. Prealarms warn of low water (engine)temperature, approaching low oil pressure, and approaching high enginetemperature.

16447-11

11.12. Heavy-Duty Air Cleaner: The air cleaner shall provide engine air filtration whichmeets the engine Manufacturer's specifications under typical operating conditions.

11.13. Remote Annunciator Panel:

1. Annunciator shall meet the following specifications:

a. Operating temperature range: -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F)

b. Storage temperature range: -40° to 85°C (-40° to 185°F)

c. Humidity range: 5-95% noncondensing

d. Enclosure: NEMA 2

e. Power supply: 12- or 24-VDC

f. Power draw: 200 mA

2. Standards:

a. NFPA 110, Level 1

b. NFPA 99

c. UL 508 Recognized

d. CE Directive (Voltage and EMC)

e. EN610000-4-4 Fast Transient Immunity

3. Hardware Requirements

a. Front panel mounted

b. Up to (24) Light-emitting diode (LED) indicators for shutdowns, warnings (pre-alarms), and status

c. Up to (19) Light-emitting diode (LED) indicators, an audible horn, an alarm silencebutton, and a lamp test button required by NFPA 110, Level 1.

d. LEDs must be activated to indicate: shutdowns, warnings (pre-alarms), or status

e. Must have a minimum of (3) LED colors to define function

f. Must have LEDs with blinking functions to indicate status

g. LEDs required to activate for the following shutdown and/or warning conditions:

16447-12

i. Overcrankii. Low Coolant Temperatureiii. High Engine Temperatureiv. Low Oil Pressurev. Overspeedvi. Emergency Stopvii. Low Fuelviii. Low Coolant Levelix. Not-In-Autox. High Battery Voltagexi. Low Battery Voltagexii. Battery Charger Failurexiii. Common Fault

h. LEDs required to activate upon the following status conditions:

i. Lamp testii. Alarm silenceiii. System readyiv. Generator runningv. Communicationsvi. EPS Supplying Load

i. Up to (3) user-defined inputs shall each activate an LED and an audible horn forshutdowns, warnings, or status conditions.

j. Annunciator shall have removable text inserts for assigning user-defined inputs,assigning generator identification, and replacement.

k. Front panel of annunciator shall be a sealed membrane and shall be capable ofboth surface-mounting and flush-mounting.

l. Network Communication

i. Provide an RS-485 connection at the annunciator from the generatorcontroller. Maximum distance shall be 1220 m (4000 ft.) from the generatorcontroller to the furthest annunciator.

ii. No other external wiring required, except power, to activate the LEDs andhorn.

12. Double Wall Secondary Containment Sub Base Fuel Tank

12.1. A sub base fuel tank shall be provided to support the generator set for a period of24 hours at 100% of rated load. The Electrical Contractor shall provide 300gallons of diesel fuel in the sub-base fuel tank prior to the building load test.The Owner shall be responsible for “topping off” the fuel tank once loadtesting is completed.

16447-13

12.2. The sub base fuel system shall be listed under UL 142, subsection entitled SpecialPurpose Tanks EFVT category, and will bear their mark of UL Approval accordingto their particular classification.

12.3. The above ground steel secondary containment rectangular tank for use as a subbase for diesel generators is manufactured and intended to be installed inaccordance with the Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code—NFPA 30, theStandard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustible Engine and GasTurbines—NFPA 37, and Emergency and Standby Power Systems—NFPA 110.

12.4. Primary Tank. It will be rectangular in shape and constructed in clam shell fashionto ensure maximum structural integrity and allow the use of a full throat fillet weld.

Steel Channel Support System. Reinforced steel box channel for generatorsupport, with a load rating of 5,000 Ibs. per generator mounting hole location. Fullheight gussets at either end of channel and at generator mounting holes shall beutilized.

Exterior Finish. The exterior coating has been tested to withstand continuous saltspray testing at 100 percent exposure for 244 hours to a 5 percent salt solution at92-97° F. The coating has been subjected to full exposure humidity testing to 100percent humidity at 100° F for 24 hours. Tests are to be conducted in accordancewith The American Standard Testing Methods Society.

12.5. Venting. Normal venting shall be sized in accordance with the American PetroleumInstitute Standard No. 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure StorageTanks not less than 1-1/4" (3 cm.) nominal inside diameter.

12.6. Emergency Venting. The emergency vent opening shall be sized to accommodatethe total capacity of both normal and emergency venting and shall be not less thanthat derived from NFPA 30, table 2-8, and based on the wetted surface area of thetank. The wetted area of the tank shall be calculated on the basis of 100 percent ofthe primary tank. The vent is spring-pressure operated: opening pressure is0.5/psig and full opening pressure is 2.5 psig. The emergency relief vent is sized toaccommodate the total venting capacity of both normal and emergency vents.

12.7. Fuel Fill. There shall be a 2" NPT opening within the primary tank and lockablemanual fill cap.

12.8. Fuel Level. A direct reading, UL listed, magnetic fuel level gauge with ahermetically sealed vacuum tested dial shall be provided to eliminate fogging.

12.9. Low Fuel Level Switch. Consists of a 30 watt float switch for remote or localannunciation of a (50% standard) low fuel level condition.

16447-14

13. Enclosure

13.1. A skid-mounted/open enclosure shall be provided for this generator to be housedinside of the safe room building.

13.2 A duct flange adapter for the radiator shall be provided to aid the MechanicalContractor with a connection between the radiator and the exhaust louver.

13.3 The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor for theexhaust pipe and critical silencer size. The Mechanical Contractor shall provideheat blankets around these items.

END OF SECTION

16446-1

SECTION 16446AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

PART 1 General

1.01 Scope

A. Furnish and install the low voltage automatic transfer switch having the ratings,features/accessories and enclosures as specified herein and as shown on the contractdrawings.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to provide acomplete and workable emergency power system as shown on the drawings andspecifications herein.

1.02 Related Sections

1.03 References

A. The automatic transfer switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured andtested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of UL and NEMA as follows:1. UL 1008 – Transfer Switches2. UL 991 - Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices3. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code4. NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems of Health Care Facilities5. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems6. NEMA ICS 10 – AC Transfer Switch Equipment7. IEEE 446 – Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

1.04 Submittals – For Review/Approval

A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:1. Front view and plan view of the assembly2. Schematic diagram3. Conduit space locations within the assembly.4. Assembly ratings including:

a. Withstand and Closing ratingb. Voltagec. Continuous current ratingd. Short-Time rating if applicablee. Short-circuit rating if ordered with integral protection

5. Cable terminal sizes6. Product Data Sheets.

16446-2

B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer:1. Busway connection2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies3. Composite front view and plan view of close-coupled assemblies

1.05 Submittals – For Construction

A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.042. Wiring diagrams3. Certified production test reports4. Installation information5. Seismic certification as specified

B. The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction drawingsand shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing and construction process.

1.06 Qualifications

A. The Manufacturer of the assembly shall be the Manufacturer of the major components withinthe assembly.

B. For the equipment specified herein, the Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

C. The Manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for aminimum period of fifteen (15) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list ofinstallations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with thisrequirement.

PART 2 Products

2.01 Ratings

A. The transfer switch shall have a 3 cycle withstand and closing rating of 30 KAIC at 208volts.

B. The voltage rating of the transfer switches shall be no less than the system voltage rating.The continuous current rating of the transfer switches shall be no less than the currentrequirements shown on the construction drawings.

C. The transfer switches shall be 100% equipment rated for continuous duty as shown on theconstruction drawings and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1008 foremergency system total load.

D. The automatic transfer switches shall be fully rated to protect all types of loads, inductiveand resistive, from loss of continuity of power, without de-rating, either open or enclosed.

2.02 Construction

A. Power Switching Device – 40-1200 Amp Contactor Type

16446-3

1. Switches rated 40-400A shall be Wall Mount construction.2. Switches rated 600-1200A shall be Wall Mount or Floor Standing construction.3. Switching devices for 40 Amp through 1200 Amp transfer switches shall be Contactor

type mechanisms. All Contactors shall be UL listed for application in their intendedenclosures for 100% of their continuous ampere rating.

4. Switches rated 40-400A shall have an in-phase monitor transition, which will permit atransfer or re-transfer between the normal and emergency sources that have a phaseangle difference of +/- 60 degrees or less.

5. Switches rated 600-1200A shall operate with a time delay in the neutral position,adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds.

6. The automatic transfer switch shall be of double throw construction operated by areliable electrical mechanism momentarily energized. There shall be a direct mechanicalcoupling to facilitate transfer in 6 cycles or less.

7. Contactors or components thereof not specifically designed, as an automatic transferswitch will not be acceptable.

B. The switching panel shall consist of a separate control or transformer panel. Control powerfor all transfer operations shall be derived from the line side of the source to which the loadis being transferred.

C. Each transfer switch shall be positively interlocked both mechanically and electrically toprevent simultaneous closing of both sources under either automatic or manual operation.Main contacts shall be mechanically held in position in both normal and emergencypositions.

D. Transfer switches will be supplied with a manual-operating handle. Manual operation shallonly be performed with the switch de-energized.

E. On transfer switches requiring a fourth pole for switching the neutral, the neutral shall beidentical to the other power poles. Switched neutral poles which are add-on or overlap, orthat are not capable of breaking full rated load current are not acceptable.

F. The transfer switch shall have a multi-tap voltage transformer for ease of voltage adjustmentin the field.

G. One (2) Form C contacts for NORMAL Source Available. The contacts shall be rated for 10-Amp, 1/3-Horsepower at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

H. One (2) Form C contacts for EMERGENCY Source Available. The contacts shall be ratedfor 10-Amp, 1/3-Horsepower at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

I. Three (3) Form C contacts for NORMAL Source Position. The contacts shall be rated for 10-Amp, 1/3-Horsepower at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

J. Three (3) Form C contacts for EMERGENCY Source Position. The contacts shall be ratedfor 10-Amp, 1/3-Horsepower at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

2.04 Microprocessor logic

A. The transfer switch shall have a microprocessor-based controller. The controller shall behardened against potential problems from transients and surges. Operation of the transferswitch and monitoring of both sources shall be managed by the controller.

16446-4

2.05 References

A. The automatic transfer switch controllers shall meet or exceed the following standards inaddition to the basic switch standards:

1. IEC 61000-4-2 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrostatic DischargeImmunity Test

2. IEC 61000-4-3 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Radio-frequency,Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test

3. IEC 61000-4-4 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Electrical FastTransient/Burst Immunity Test

4. IEC 61000-4-5 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Surge Immunity Test

5. IEC 61000-4-6 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Immunity to ConductedDisturbances, Induced by Radio-frequency Fields

6. IEC 61000-4-11 - EMC Testing and Measurement Techniques - Voltage Dips, ShortInterrupts and Voltage Variations Immunity Tests

7. CISPR11, Class B - Industrial, Scientific and Medical Radio-frequency Equipment -Electromagnetic Disturbance Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement

8. FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B

2.07 Microprocessor-based controller (Open Transition)

A. The microprocessor-based logic controller shall be door mounted and shall provide theoperator with an overview of the transfer switch status, parameters, and diagnostic data.The controller shall have a voltage range of 0-790 volts (50/60 Hz) and an accuracy of +/-1% of nominal input voltage. The controller shall have a frequency range of 40-70 Hz and anaccuracy of +/- .3 Hz. Control power input range from 65 VAC – 145 VAC RMS 50/60 Hz.The controller shall be listed under UL Standard 1008.

1. The microprocessor-based logic controller shall have an operating environmental rangeof:

a. Operation –20C to +70C degreesb. Storage –30C to +85C degreesc. Relative Humidity (Non-Condensing) 0-95%d. The microprocessor-based controller display shall be UV resistant and include a

backlit LCD display, 2-line, 16 character and shall be capable of displaying thefollowing:

e. Connected Source voltages on all phasesf. Connected Source frequencyg. Real time clock for Time / Date stamph. Historical datai. Programming and set point informationj. Password entry

16446-5

k. Timer countdown for each timer while functioningl. Help function for detailed description of displayed messages

2. The microprocessor-based controller shall include five (5) individual LED’s for indicatingthe following:

a. Unit Statusb. Mimic Diagram showing Availability status of NORMAL sourcec. Mimic Diagram showing Availability status of EMERGENCY sourced. Mimic Diagram showing Connection status of NORMAL sourcee. Mimic Diagram showing Connection status of EMERGENCY sourcef. The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following features:g. Password programming protectionh. Set points shall be stored in Non-Volatile memory, and use of an external battery

source to maintain operation during “dead” periods shall not be required

3. Historical Data Storage to include:

a. Engine Run Timeb. NORMAL source Available timec. EMERGENCY source Available timed. NORMAL source Connected timee. EMERGENCY source Connected timef. LOAD Energized Timeg. Number of Transfersh. Date, Time and Reason for Last Sixteen (16) transfersi. Monitor Mode Eventj. Fail Safe Eventk. Aborted Test

4. The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following voltage and frequencyfeatures:

a. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY sourceshall be monitored, with under-voltage dropout adjustable 78 - 97% of nominal andpickup adjustable from dropout setting +2% - 99% of nominal.

b. The frequency of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall bemonitored, with under-frequency dropout adjustable from 90 - 97% of nominal andpickup from dropout setting +1Hz - 99% of nominal.

16446-6

c. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY sourceshall be monitored, with over-voltage dropout adjustable from 105 - 110% of nominaland pickup adjustable from the dropout setting –2% - 103% of nominal.

d. The frequency of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall bemonitored, with over-frequency dropout adjustable from 103 - 105% of nominal andadjustable pickup from the dropout setting -1Hz - 101% of nominal.

e. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source shall be monitored, with PhaseUnbalance dropout adjustable from 5% to 20% of nominal and pickup adjustablefrom 3 to (Dropout setting -2%)

f. The voltage of each phase of the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored, withPhase Unbalance dropout adjustable from 5% to 20% of nominal and pickupadjustable from 3 to (Dropout setting -2%)

g. The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source shall be monitored, with PhaseReversal protection.

h. The voltage of each phase of the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored, withPhase Reversal protection.

5. The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following time delay features:

a. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to EMERGENCY source, adjustable from0 to 1800 seconds. TDNE – Time Delay Normal to Emergency

b. A time delay shall be provided to override a momentary power outage or voltagefluctuation, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds. TDES – Time Delay engine Start

c. A time delay shall be provided on retransfer from EMERGENCY source to NORMALsource, adjustable from 0 to 1800 seconds. TDEN – Time Delay Emergency toNormal

d. A time delay shall be provided after retransfer that allows the generator to rununloaded prior to shutdown, adjustable form 0 to 1800 seconds. TDEC – Time DelayEngine Cool down

e. A time delay shall be provided for engine failure to start, fixed setting of 6 seconds.TDEF – Time Delay Engine Fail

f. All delays shall be field adjustable from the microprocessor-based controller withoutthe use of special tools.

16446-7

6. The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following features, pushbuttonsand selector switches:

a. “HELP”, “INCREASE”, “DECREASE”, “DISPLAY SELECT” and “STEP””pushbuttons

b. Plant exerciser, selectable – disabled, 7, 14, 28 day interval, adjustable 0-600minutes, load or no load with Failsafe

c. System Test Pushbuttond. Bypass Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN) Pushbuttone. Bypass Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE) Pushbutton

7. The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following input/output contacts:

a. One (1) Form C contact for closure of the Generator start circuit. The contacts shallbe of silver alloy with gold flashing. The contacts shall be rated for 5-Amp at 250-Vacand 5-Amp at 30-Vdc.

b. One (1) Form C contact for PRE-TRANSFER SIGNAL. The contacts shall be ratedfor 10-Amp at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

2.08 Wiring/Terminations

A. Terminal blocks shall conform to NEMA ICS 4. Terminal facilities shall be arranged forentrance of external conductors from the top or bottom of the enclosure. The main transferswitch terminals shall be suitable for the termination of conductors shown on theconstruction drawings.

2.09 Enclosure

A. Each transfer switch shall be provided in a NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for use inenvironments indicated in the construction drawings.

2.12 Finish

A. NEMA 1 enclosures shall be painted with the Manufacturer’s standard light gray ANSI61paint.

PART 3 Execution

3.01 Examination

3.02 Factory Testing

A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided underthis section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMAstandards.1. Insulation check to ensure the integrity of insulation and continuity of the entire system

16446-8

2. Visual inspection to ensure that the switch matches the specification requirements andto verify that the fit and finish meet quality standards

3. Mechanical tests to verify that the switch's power sections are free of mechanicalhindrances

4. Electrical tests to verify the complete electrical operation of the switch and to set up timedelays and voltage sensing settings of the logic

B. The Manufacturer shall provide a certified copy of factory test reports.

C. All Transfer switches shall include a label indicating order number, catalog number and date

3.03 Installation

A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the Manufacturer’s recommendations and thecontract drawings

B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor

3.04 Field Quality Control

A. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to thecontractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testingof the assembly and components contained therein.

3.05 Manufacturer’s Certification

A. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the Manufacturer’s Representative’s certification.

3.06 Training

A. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the operation of the transfer switchand the major components within the assembly.

3.07 Field Service Organization

A. The Manufacturer of the ATS shall also have a national service organization that is availablethroughout the contiguous United States and is available on call 24 hours a day, 365 days ayear.

END OF SECTION

16460-1

SECTION 16460SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

Furnish and install all switches and receptacles in accordance with this specification and therequirements of the NEC.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


Switches and receptacles shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Cooper Wiring Devices, Leviton, orPass & Seymour.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Switches and receptacles shall be specification grade. They shall have ampacityand voltage ratings suitable for the application in which they are used.

B. Consult Architect or Engineer for device colors prior to ordering devices.

C. Provide brushed stainless steel cover plates for all devices. A single cover plateshall cover all devices in one box.

D. Light switches shall be 20 Ampere, 120-277V back-wired and side-wired toggleswitches. They shall be rated up to 2 HP at 240V. Each switch shall be equippedwith a grounding screw. Switches shall be Hubbell CSB series or approved equal.

E. Duplex NEMA 5-20R receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL 5362A or approved equal.

F. Duplex GFI NEMA 5-20R receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL GF5362A or approvedequal.

G. Weatherproof while-in-use cover plates shall be Teddico #34017-7 or approvedequal. Cover plates shall be single gang, lockable, and constructed of heavy dutydie cast metal.

H. All 125V, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles installed in dwelling units shall be of thetamper-resistant type.

I. All 15 and 20 ampere, 125 and 250V non-locking receptacles installed in wet ordamp locations shall be listed as the weather-resistant type.

J. Devices furnished in this Contract, but not listed above, shall be of the samestandard of quality as those items listed.


16460-2

3.1 Flush mount all devices unless specific written permission is obtained from the Engineerfor a particular device in a particular location.

3.2 Install all devices vertically unless the drawings specifically state that the particular deviceshould be mounted horizontally.

3.3 Install receptacles by utilizing pigtails. Do not install receptacles in a “feed thru” fashion.

3.4 Install receptacles with the ground slot up.

END OF SECTION

16470-1

SECTION 16470ELECTRICAL STUDIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 The Electrical Studies in this specification shall be performed by the electrical gearManufacturer. The Electrical Studies shall be preliminarily performed at the electrical gearsubmittal time and then updated when all of the electrical gear is installed and the exactelectrical parameters are known.

1.2 The purpose of the preliminary study (Protective Device Coordination and Fault CurrentStudies) is to verify that the submitted electrical gear is submitted with the correct circuitbreakers and distribution equipment for the facilities’ power system. The initial study shallbe conducted using the electrical gear specified in the construction documents. The SingleLine Diagram in the construction drawings shall be used for circuitry sizes of the majorelectrical gear. The Power, Mechanical, and Equipment Plans in the construction drawingsshall be used for circuitry sizes of the remaining electrical gear. The Utility transformer shallbe modeled using “worst case” parameters for impedance and infinite short circuit currentavailable at the primary of the transformer. Dry type transformers shall be modeled usingtypical impedances for the size of transformer specified. Emergency generators shall bemodeled using “worst case” parameters for sub-transient reactance and a typical decrementcurve for the kW size of generator specified utilizing a permanent magnet alternator. TheElectrical Contractor shall assist the electrical gear Manufacturer’s Engineer with estimatedcircuitry lengths, fault currents, transformer sizes, generator sizes, and any other necessaryinformation. The studies shall be run, evaluated, and then submitted along with theelectrical gear submittals. The equipment AIC ratings on the Drawings and in theSpecifications represent the minimum acceptable ratings. Higher rated equipment shall beprovided as necessary, based on study results. The Protective Device Coordination Studyshall show that the submitted electrical gear selectively coordinates and adequately protectsall equipment, including transformer, motor, and generator damage curves. Electrical gearsubmittals will not be approved without the results of this study. An electronic copy of thepower system model shall be saved by the electrical gear Manufacturer’s Engineer for aperiod of seven years.

1.3 After all of the electrical gear is installed and the exact electrical parameters of the projectare known, the Electrical Contractor shall give that information to the electrical gearManufacturer’s Engineer. The saved power system model shall be updated with the exactutility X/R ratios (three phase and phase-to-ground), utility primary voltage over-currentprotection devices, transformer impedances, circuitry sizes, circuitry lengths, generator sub-transient reactance, and generator overload curves. The purpose of updating thepreliminary power system model is to provide accurate information for Arc Flash Labels,Available Fault Current Labels, and Protective Device Settings. A Fault Current Study, aProtective Device Coordination Study, and an Arc Flash Study shall be run, evaluated, andthen submitted to the Electrical Engineer for approval. The approved study report shall beused for setting the Protective Devices, producing Arc Flash Labels, and producingAvailable Fault Current Labels.

1.4 It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor and the Gear Manufacturer’s Engineer togather all of the necessary information for the studies. The Power Source, PLLC will notinvestigate and/or provide the required information for the studies.

16470-2

PART 2 – ELECTRICAL STUDIES PERFORMED

2.1 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH STUDIES

A. The Contractor shall employ the equipment Manufacturer’s Engineers to perform theProtective Device Coordination and Arc Flash studies. The Engineer responsible forthe study shall perform such work as his job responsibility, and shall have performedat least 100 such studies in his career. Submit the Engineer’s credentials with thestudy results.

B. Analyses shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment and system to beprovided meet the specified requirements for equipment ratings, coordination, andprotection. They shall include a fault current analysis and protective devicecoordination study.

C. Scope of Analyses. The Fault Current Analysis, Protective Device Coordination, andArc Flash Studies shall include all electrical equipment where the incident energylevel is greater than 1.2 Cal/cm^2. The term electrical gear shall include thefollowing: Transformers (Utility & Dry Type), Switchboards, Panelboards, MotorControl Centers, Disconnects, Loadcenters, Enclosed Circuit Breakers, MotorStarters, Contactors, etc.

D. Determination of Facts. The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplatedata for each existing protective device shall be determined and documented. TheContractor shall coordinate with the commercial power company for three phase andsingle phase fault current availability and X/R ratios at the site.

E. Single-Line Diagram. Provide a single-line diagram to show the electrical systembuses, devices, transformation points, and all sources of fault current (includinggenerator and motor contributions). A fault-impedance diagram or a computeranalysis diagram shall be provided. Each bus, device or transformation point shallhave a unique identifier. If a fault-impedance diagram is provided, impedance datashall be shown. Locations of switches, breakers, and circuit interrupting devicesshall be shown on the diagram, together with available fault data, and the deviceinterrupting rating.

F. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis:

1. Method. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall be performed in accordance withthe latest applicable NFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910 Sub part S, IEEE1584, and NESC Standards. The intent of this specification is to require thatArc Flash calculations be performed on all 208V and above electricalequipment, even if NFPA 70E doesn't require the calculations to beperformed for that equipment. The study must be performed using IEEE 1584for equipment rated 50 to 15kV and NESC for equipment rated above 15kV. Theuse of NFPA 70E Task Tables to determine Hazard Classification is notacceptable.

2. Data. The analysis shall consider all operating scenarios during normalconditions, alternate operations, emergency power conditions, and any otheroperations, which could result in maximum Arc Flash Hazard. The label shall list

16470-3

the maximum incidental energy calculated and the scenario. Possible scenariosinclude, but are not limited to: Normal Utility Power, Emergency GeneratorPower, Bus Tie Breaker Open, Bus Tie Breaker Closed, UPS Power, etc..

G. Fault Current Analysis:

1. Method. The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance withmethods described in IEEE Std 242, and IEEE Std 399.

2. Data. Actual data shall be utilized in final fault calculations. Bus characteristicsand transformer impedances shall be those proposed for the initial analysis.Data shall be documented in the report.

G. Fault Current Availability. Balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault, andline-to-ground fault current values shall be provided at each voltage transformationpoint and at each power distribution bus. This data shall be shown in tabular form onthe diagram or in the report.

H. Coordination Study. The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degreeof selectivity has been obtained between all electrical equipment, consistent withprotection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and faultconditions. The study shall include a description of the coordination of the protectivedevices in this project. Provide a written narrative that describes: which devicesmay operate in the event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at deviceratings and settings; any situations where system coordination is not achievable dueto device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap); coordinationbetween upstream and downstream devices; and settings. Providerecommendations to improve or enhance system reliability and detail where suchchanges would involve additions or modifications to the Contract. Cost changes(addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite coordination plots shall beprovided on log-log graph paper.

I. Study Reports (Initial and Final)

1. The reports shall include a narrative: the analyses performed; the bases andmethods used; and the desired method of coordinated protection of the powersystem.

2. The reports shall include descriptive and technical data for existing devices andnew protective devices proposed. The data shall include Manufacturer’spublished data, nameplate data, and definition of the fixed or adjustable featuresof the existing or new protective devices.

3. The reports shall document utility company data including system voltages, faultMVA, system three phase X/R ratio and magnitude, system single line to groundX/R ratio and magnitude, time-current characteristic curves, current transformerratios, relay device curves, and protective device ratings & settings.

4. The reports shall contain fully coordinated composite time-current characteristiccurves for each bus in the system as required to ensure coordinated powersystem protection between protective devices or equipment. The report shall

16470-4

include recommended devices or equipment. The report shall includerecommended ratings and settings of all protective devices in tabulated form.

5. The reports shall provide the calculations performed for the analyses includingcomputer analysis programs utilized. The name of the software package,developer, and version number shall be provided.

PART 3 – LABELS

3.1 The Electrical Gear Manufacturer shall print Arc Flash Labels for all electrical gear,Switchboards, Panelboards, Transformers (all except Utility), Motor ControlCenters, Disconnects, Loadcenters, Enclosed Circuit Breakers, Motor Starters,Contactors, etc. Arc Flash labels shall comply with the label detail in the constructiondrawings. The labels shall be of a type and quality to last in the environment in which theyare installed. The labels shall be furnished to the Electrical Contractor for installation bythe Electrical Contractor.

3.2 The Electrical Contractor shall make the Available Fault Current Labels complying with thelabel detail in the construction drawings for each piece of electrical gear. The ProtectiveDevice Coordination Study report shall be used for providing the Available Fault Current ateach location. The labels shall comply with NEC Article 110.24 of the 2011 edition.Available Fault Current labels shall be of a type and quality to last in the environment inwhich they are installed. The labels shall be mounted according to the label detail in theconstruction drawings.

END OF SECTION

264800-1

SECTION 264800 - REVISEDELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 This specification describes the requirements for inspection and testing of electricalequipment. The Contractor shall provide inspection, testing, calibration and adjustmentof electrical equipment or engage the services of a qualified third party testingorganization. If a third party testing organization is employed for these tasks, they shallbe a first tier subcontractor.

1.2 Notify the Engineer at least one week in advance of all tests. The Engineer and/orOwner shall have the right to witness all tests. The Contractor shall submit threecopies of all inspection and test reports. All reports shall include certification ofcompliance with specified requirements, identify deficiencies, and recommend correctiveaction when appropriate. Test reports shall be neatly typed and bound and shall besubmitted not more than six days after tests are completed.

PART 2 – PERFORMANCE

2.1 The Contractor or testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections.Test methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated inaccordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and with the InternationalElectrical Testing Association, Inc. Publication ATS-2007, “Acceptance TestingSpecifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems” (NETA ATS2007).

2.2 The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization shop drawings of the equipmentand a copy of the approved protective device coordination study showing the requiredsettings.

2.3 Optional tests in NETA ATS 2007 are not required unless otherwise specified.

2.4 Electrical equipment shall not be placed into service until after the completion of allrequired tests and evaluations of the test results have been completed.

PART 3 – EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED

3.1 480 Volt Switchgear/Switchboards/Enclosed Circuit Breakers

3.1.1 Perform tests in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS 2007 Section7.1.

3.1.2 Each circuit breaker installed in a Switchboard/Switchgear Line Up and anypanelboard-mounted circuit breaker 100A and above shall be tested. Performtests on all low circuit breakers in accordance with applicable sections of NETAATS 2007 Section 7.6.1.2.

3.1.3 Primary injection testing shall be used for all circuit breakers. If the Switchboardhas a modified ground fault differential system or zone selective interlocking,

264800-2

testing in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations shall beperformed prior to energizing this equipment.

3.1.4 The Contractor shall set/verify the breaker settings for all circuit breaker trip unitswith the setting information from the protective device coordination study.

3.1.5 For metering and current & voltage transformers, perform ratio, polarity,insulation resistance, and injection testing as required to verify that eachcomponent is functioning properly and that the overall system is wired correctly.

3.2 Motor Control Centers (600V and Below)

3.2.1 Perform tests in accordance with applicable sections of NETA ATS 2007 Section7.16.2.1. Only the tests to certify that the buses can be safely energized arerequired.

3.2.2 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistance ohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.16.2.1. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s published data.

3.2.3 Each Motor Control Center with an installed meter shall be current injectiontested to verify that the meter is function properly and that the overall system iswired correctly.

3.3 Low Voltage (600V and Below) Feeders

3.3.1 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistance ohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.3.2.1. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s published data.

3.3.2 Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground andadjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300-volt ratedcable and 1000 volts dc for 600-volt rated cable. The test duration shall be oneminute. (NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.3.2.2).

3.3.3 Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.

3.3.4 Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3.4 Medium Voltage Shielded Power Cable

3.4.1 Each cable shall be tested for insulation integrity prior to energizing. The testedcable shall include all splices, terminations, and the overall length of theconductor, but shall not include switchgear, transformers, nor lightning arresters.The test shall include 10 to 15 minutes of exposure to high voltage D.C. withleakage current values monitored, recorded, and supplied to the Engineer ingraphical form. The cable shall be tested in accordance with the Manufacturer’srecommendations.

264800-3

Test Duration: 15 minutes. If the leakage current quickly stabilizes, the testduration may be reduced to ten minutes.

Test Type: D. C. high voltage

Test voltage for new cable with field-installed terminations shall be as follows:o 5kV - 115 mils Cables, 12.5kV Test Voltageo 15kV - 220 mils Cables, 40kV Test Voltageo 25kV - 320 mils Cables, 55kV Test Voltage

Test voltage for existing cables less than five years old shall be as follows:o 5kV Cables, 8.5kV Test Voltageo 15kV Cables, 25kV Test Voltageo 25kV Cables, 40kV Test Voltage

3.4.2 The currents resulting from the D.C. high voltage testing shall be recorded andprovided to the Engineer. The test results shall demonstrate that the leakagecurrent decreases or remains constant after reaching the specified test voltage.

3.5 FR3 Fluid Filled Transformers

3.5.1 The production testing procedure is covered in the utility transformerspecification.

3.5.2 Perform a turns-ratio and insulation resistance test in accordance with NETAATS 2007 Section 7.2.2 to certify that the transformer can be safely energized.

3.5.3 A certified, third-party testing laboratory shall perform a dissolved gas analysis(DGA) test on each medium voltage, oil-filled transformer supplied under thiscontract. The Testing laboratory shall create a report for each transformer, whichwill include baseline data for comparison with future DGA tests. The tests shallbe performed after the transformers have been initially energized, but before theconstruction is complete.

3.6 Grounding

3.6.1 The overall, installed grounding electrode system shall have a resistance to earthof 5 ohms or less.

3.6.2 All bolted connections shall be checked for high resistance using a low-resistance ohmmeter in accordance with NETA ATS 2007 Section 7.13.2.

3.6.3 Perform a three/four point fall-of-potential method, four point Wenner method, oralternative test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 81 on the installed, maingrounding electrode system. Hand-held Ground Resistance Multimeters andMEGGER insulation testers are NOT approved testing methods.

3.7 Equipment Ground Fault Protection

3.7.1 When equipment ground fault protection is utilized, it shall be performance testedin accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and NEC Article 230.95(C),

264800-4

517.17(D), and 708.52(C). A written record shall be made of this test. This testshall be performed when the gear is fully assembled and in its proper location,but before any conductors are terminated.

3.8 Emergency/Standby Generators and Associated Automatic Transfer Switches

3.8.1 The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specificationsfollowing completion of all site work and after normal power is available. Testingshall be conducted by the Manufacturer's local distributor, with required fuelsupplied by the Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shallhave the option to witness the tests.

Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on-site shall include a "cold start"test, a two hour full load test, and a one step rated load pickup test in accordancewith NFPA 110. A resistive load bank and temporary connections shall beprovided as required for the full load test.

NFPA 110 Load Test Regulations:

1. Verify that the equipment is installed properly.2. Check all auxiliary devices for proper operation, including battery

charger, jacket water heater(s), generator space heater, remoteannunciator, automatic transfer switches, etc.

3. Test all alarms and safety shutdown devices for proper operation andannunciation.

4. Check all fluid levels.5. Start engine and check for exhaust, oil, fuel leaks, vibrations, etc.6. The system shall be tested under full load and monitor the following

readings:a) Oil pressureb) Coolant temperaturec) Battery charge rated) AC voltse) AC Amperes- all phasesf) Frequencyg) Kilowattsh) Ambient Temperature

7. Verify proper voltage and phase rotation at the transfer switch beforeconnecting to the load.

8. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This testshall be conducted by opening the power supply from the utilityservice, and observing proper operation of the system for at least 2hours. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with sitepersonnel.

END OF SECTION

16490-1

SPECIFICATION 16490SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)

LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Divisions 1 Specification sections apply to this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. General electrical requirements.

B. Raceways, boxes and fittings.

C. Wire and cable.

D. Low voltage motor control.

E. Variable frequency drives.

F. Grounding.

G. Lightning protection systems.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Surge Protection Device (SPD) is the description and equipment required for the protection of all ACelectrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced voltages, externalswitching transients and internally generated switching transients.

1.4 REFERERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

A. The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply to the work of this section:

1. ANSI/IEEE C84.1-1989, American National Standard for Electric Power Systems and Equipment -Voltage Ratings (60 Hertz)

2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-VoltageAC Power Circuits

4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for EquipmentConnected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

5. Underwriters Laboratories UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard for Safety – Surge SuppressionDevices

6. Underwriters Laboratories, UL 1283, Standard for Safety - Electromagnetic Interference Filters

16490-2

7. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 780 - National Electrical Code

8. IEEE Standard 142-1991, IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial andCommercial Power Systems (IEEE Green Book)

9. ANSI/IEEE Standard 141-1999, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution forIndustrial Plants (IEEE Red Book)

10. IEEE Standard 1100-1999, IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding SensitiveElectronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book)

11. FIPS Pub 94, Federal Information Processing Standards Publication - Guideline on ElectricalPower for ADP Installations

12. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association LS-1, 1992 (NEMA LS-1)

13. MIL Standard 220A Method of Insertion-loss Measurement

14. ISO 9001:2000, Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development,Production, Installation and Servicing

1.5 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS

A. All SPD devices shall comply with the construction drawings and specifications contained herein.

B. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing SPDs.

C. The Manufacturer shall submit a written statement indicating that a factory authorized representativeinspected the installation. The installing Contractor shall submit a checkout memorandum to theManufacturer. The memorandum shall indicate the date the equipment is placed into service and theactual method of installation. Submit three copies to the specifying Engineer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The SPD and supporting components shall be guaranteed by the Manufacturer to be free of defects inmaterial and workmanship for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of substantial completion ofservice and activation of the system to which the suppressor is attached.

B. An SPD that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall be replacedfree of charge. Since “Acts of Nature” or similar statements typically include the threat of lightning towhich the SPD’s shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the "GeneralConditions" section of this specification shall not apply to this section. The warranty shall cover the entiredevice.

C. The installation of SPD’s in or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromise or violateequipment listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. The Surge Suppression Device submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the followinginformation:

1. Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types and connectionconfiguration and lead lengths.

2. Manufacturer’s certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirementsof this specification.

16490-3

3. Suppressor Manufacturer shall provide certified test data confirming Short Circuit Current Rating(SCCR) of the SPD(s).

4. UL 1449 clamp voltage documentation

5. Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, andmounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies.

6. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials.

7. SPD wiring, bonding and grounding connections shall be indicated on the wiring diagrams for eachsystem. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections toequipment to be protected.

8. If requested, a sample of each suppressor type shall be submitted for use in testing and evaluation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.0 Accepted Manufacturers

All Manufacturer’s meeting these specifications and construction drawing requirements will beacceptable.

PERFORMANCE

A. GENERAL

1. SPD’s shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard for Safety, Surge ProtectiveDevices and UL 1283, Standard for Safety, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.

2. The SPD shall protect all modes:

a. A three-phase, four-wire plus ground (wye) voltage system shall have ten discrete suppressioncircuits: 3-modes (Line-to-Ground), 3-modes (Line-to-Line), 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral) and 1-mode (Neutral-to-Ground). Line-to-Neutral-to-Ground is not an acceptable substitute for Line-to-Ground.

b. A three-phase, 3-wire plus ground (delta) voltage system shall have six discrete modes ofprotection: 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral) and 3-modes (Line-to-Ground).

c. A three-phase, 4-wire plus ground (high-leg delta) voltage system shall have seven discretemodes of protection: 3-modes (Line-to-Ground), 3-modes (Line-to-Neutral) and 1-mode (Neutral-to-Ground).

3. For new switchboards and panelboards, SPD’s shall be integrally mounted inside theenclosures. For existing switchboards and panelboards, the SPD shall be mounted as closeto the circuit breaker feeding it as possible. If remote mounted, the SPD shall not affect NECcode clearance of the electrical installation.

4. SPD’s shall use a separate path to building ground; the equipment safety ground is not to beused as a transient ground path. The SPD’s grounding conductor shall be bonded to thenearest appropriate grounding point using suitable lugs or connectors.

16490-4

5. SPD’s shall have a SCCR of 200kA. Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstratedwithstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6.

6. SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n) (verifiable at UL.com) for compliance to UL 96ALightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.

7. The SPD circuit construction of the main surge current diversion path shall be MOV (metal-oxidevaristors) based. The protection status of device shall be clearly monitored on the front panel of theSPD enclosure.

8. Each SPD shall be provided with a protective disconnecting means in accordance with coderequirements.

a) Where SPDs are being furnished for new panels, a 30A, 3-pole circuit breaker shall beinstalled in the panelboard to serve the SPD (adjust breaker size and wire size asrequired for other vendor’s equipment). .

b) Where SPDs are being furnished for existing panels, a 30A, 3-pole circuit breaker shallbe installed in the panelboard to serve the SPD (adjust breaker size and wire size asrequired for other vendor’s equipment). Where there is no space in the existing panel,provide an SPD with integral disconnect switch, and provide the necessary hardware toconnect the SPD to the panelboard bus.

9. Suppressor shall have turn-on and turn-off times of less than one nanosecond.

10. SPD’s shall be constructed using metal-oxide varistor (MOV) based suppression circuits. The SPDshall have a response time of less than one nanosecond with six inches or less of connected leadlength for any individual protection mode.

11. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less than 125%for a 120V system and 115% for 220, 240, 277, and 480V systems.

B. SERVICE ENTRANCE PROTECTION

1. Type 1 Devices: The service entrance SPD equipment shall meet or exceed the minimumperformance criteria as follows:

a. The single-impulse surge-current rating shall be a minimum of 240,000 Amperes per phase(120,000 Amperes per mode).

b. UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating for the following configurations shall not exceedthe following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V277/480V 1200V 1200V 1200V

c. The SPD's pulse life when subjected to an ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category (20kV-1.2/50µs,10kA-8/20µs) waveform shall survive a minimum of 10,000 hits or occurrences.

d. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on the frontpanel of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate suppression circuit status, phase status,phase loss and suppression fault.

e. Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. Eachterminal shall accommodate wire sizes of #10 to #1 AWG.

16490-5

f. SPD's shall be provided with a set of normally-open/normally-closed Form “C” dry contacts forremote monitoring.

g. SPD's enclosure type shall be rated NEMA 4.h. SPD’s shall have a diagnostics LCD panel display providing information on phase loss (specific to

each phase), percentage of protection for each phase, surge/transient event count, storedcumulative surge/transient event history, technical support information and an audible alarm witha muting function.

C. DISTRIBUTION PANEL PROTECTION

1. Type 2A Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The distribution panel SPD equipment shall meet orexceed the minimum performance criteria as follows:


b. The UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating for the following configurations shall notexceed the following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V277/480V 1200V 1200V 1200V

c. SPD’s shall be of compact design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow a straight andshort lead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection in the panel board.

d. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on the frontpanel of the enclosure. The indicator lights shall indicate suppression circuit status, phase status,phase loss, reduced protection level and suppression fault.

e. A set of normally open/normally closed Form “C” dry contacts shall be provided for remotemonitoring.

f. The enclosure type shall have a NEMA 4 rating.

D. SUBPANEL PROTECTION

1. Type 2B Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The subpanel SPD equipment shall meet or exceed theminimum performance criteria as follows:


b. The UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage Protection Rating or the following configurations shall notexceed the following:

Voltage Configuration L-G L-N N-G120/208V 700V 700V 700V

c. Visual indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be easily viewed on the frontpanel of the enclosure.

d. A set of normally open/normally closed Form “C” dry contacts shall be provided for remotemonitoring.

e. The enclosure type shall have a NEMA 4 rating.

F. POINT-OF-USE SINGLE-PHASE (120 VAC) HARD-WIRED SUPPRESSORS

16490-6

1. Type 3 Devices (Type 1 is acceptable): The subpanel SPD equipment shall meet or exceed theminimum performance criteria as follows:


b. A single-phase, two-wire plus ground voltage system shall have three discrete suppressioncircuits: 1-mode (Line-to-Ground), 1-mode (Line-to-Neutral) and 1-mode (Neutral-to-Ground).Line-to-Neutral-to-Ground is not an acceptable substitute for Line-to-Ground.

c. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 3RD Edition, Standard for Safety,Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. The SPD's UL 1449 Third Edition Voltage ProtectionRating shall not exceed 700 volts peak.

d. The SPD's pulse life when subjected to an ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category B3/C1 (6 kV -1.2/50 µs, 3 kA - 8/20 µs) waveform once every 30 seconds shall survive a minimum of 3000 hitsor occurrences.

e. Visual indication of proper connection and operation shall be provided conveniently on theenclosure of the SPD.

f. SPD(s) shall provide fusing in such a manner that the power to the load is not interrupted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall follow the SPD Manufacturer’s recommended installation practice as found in theequipment installation instructions.

B. SPD’s shall be of compact design. The mounting position of the SPD shall allow a straight and shortlead-length connection between the SPD and the point of connection in the panelboard.

C. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practicallypossible.

D. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short and straightest possible leads toSPD’s.

E. The installation shall apply to all applicable codes.

3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility service entrance location whether indicated on the drawings or not.

B. The SPD's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground.

C. Neutral and ground shall be bonded together at service entrance panel locations.

3.3 DISTRIBUTION PANEL PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility distribution panel location whether indicated on the drawings or not.

B. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded together inside any distribution panel location.

3.4 SUBPANEL PROTECTION

A. Install one SPD at each utility subpanel location where indicated on the drawings.

16490-7

B. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded together inside any subpanel location.

3.4 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AC POWER SUPPLY POINT-OF-USE (120VAC) HARD-WIRED PROTECTION

A. Install one each point-of-use (120VAC) hard-wired SPD between each equipment item and itspower supply conductors as follows:

a. Fire alarm master panelb. Intercom masterc. Building energy management system masterd. Security system mastere. Telephone system switchf. TV head end

B. Install SPD's according to Manufacturer's installation instructions.

END OF SECTION

16500-1

SECTION 16500LIGHTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Provide all lighting fixtures (luminaires), lamps, drivers/ballasts, wiring, end caps,connectors, fittings, structural support members, supports, brackets, etc., for a completeand operable lighting system.

1.2 Prior to submitting electrical equipment brochures for review and approval, coordinatewith the General Contractor and verify that the fixtures are appropriate for the ceilingtypes in which they are shown to be installed. Also, verify that driver/ballast voltage andemergency battery voltage (if applicable) on the submittals is appropriate for theelectrical system on which the fixtures are to be installed (regardless of voltage listed inthe part number in the Fixture Schedule). Submit with equipment brochures a certificatestating that these items of coordination have been completed.

1.3 Submittal Product Data: Arrange in order of luminaire designation. The submittals shallinclude data on features, ratings, listings, certifications, accessories, finishes,dimensions, emergency components, photometric data, and luminaire efficiency data.

1.4 All lighting fixtures shall be specification grade and listed or labeled by UnderwritersLaboratories (UL) or an approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires are shown in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings to establish astandard of quality. Manufacturer’s names and model numbers shall not beinterpreted as a proprietary specification. Notify the Engineer at least two weeksprior to bid if an equivalent for a fixture listed in the schedule is not readily available,

B. Provide the appropriate lamps, trim types, lenses, and accessories for properinstallation in the area shown on the drawing. Coordinate with the ceiling Contractorduring the creation of shop drawings to ensure that fixtures are appropriate for thetype of ceiling being installed.

C. LED fixtures shall comply with the following:a. UL Standard 8750 “Light Emitting Diode Equip. for Use in Lighting Products”b. IES Standard LM-79c. IES Standard LM-80d. IES Standard TM-21e. ANSI C78.377

D. Provide only LED fixtures with a DesignLights Consortium (DLC) Listing, a U.S.Department of Energy (DOE) “LED Lighting Facts” Label, or a U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR Label, which have demonstrated third-party testing verification.

16500-2

E. LED fixtures shall be modular and allow for separate replacement of LED lamps anddrivers. Dimmable LED fixtures shall have either a 0-10V, 3-Wire Dimming Driver, aTwo-Step (50-100%) line voltage, or Two Switch contolled Dimming Driver as shownon the construction drawings.

2.2 LAMPS

A. All user serviceable lamps, drivers, and ballasts shall be replaceable from the roomside of the fixture.

B. Interior LED lamps shall have a color temperature of 3500°K and exterior LED lampsshall have a color temperature of 4000°K, unless noted otherwise on theconstruction drawings. Each shall have a lumen maintenance L70 rating of 50,000hours as a minimum.

C. Retrofit LED lamps shall comply with NEMA SSL 4 “SSL Retrofit Lamps: SuggestedMinimum Performance Requirements”.

D. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 125V and shall have a minimum rated life of2,000 hours. Incandescent lamps shall be of the appropriate size with theappropriate base configuration for installation in the fixture specified. Incandescentlamps shall be clear unless otherwise specified.

E. T8 fluorescent lamps shall be rapid-start with a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 75and a color temperature of 3500°K.

F. T5 & T5HO fluorescent lamps shall be rapid-start with a Color Rendering Index (CRI)of 82 and a color temperature of 3500°K.

G. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4 pin, 13 watt minimum with a color temperatureof 3500°K, a minimum CRI of 80, end-of-life protection, and they shall be suitable foruse with electronic ballasts. Self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamps are notacceptable except for retrofitting existing incandescent fixtures.

H. Induction lamps shall have a color temperature of 3500°K and a minimum CRI of 80.

I. HID Lamps shall be clear unless otherwise noted. They shall have a colortemperature of 3500°K. Coordinate base size with fixture socket prior to orderinglamps. HID lamps shall conform to their applicable ANSI codes.

2.3 BALLASTS

A. LED drivers shall be electronic-type, labeled as compliant with radio frequencyinterference (RFI) requirements of FCC Title 47 Part 15, and comply with NEMA SSL1 “Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems”. LED drivers shall have asound rating of “A”, have a minimum efficiency of 85%, and be rated for a THD ofless than 20 percent at all input voltages.

B. Dimmable LED drivers shall be of the 0-10V type. Dimmable LED drivers shall becapable of dimming without LED strobing or flicker across their full dimming range.

16500-3

C. Fluorescent luminaires shall be furnished with energy-saving, high power factor (0.9or higher), electronic ballasts. Ballasts shall operate lamps without noticeable flickerand shall operate within the IES recommended noise levels. Ballasts shall operateat a frequency no less than 20,000 Hz. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than10%. Ballasts shall be able to withstand voltage transients in accordance with IEEEC62.41, Category A for normal and common modes. Ballasts shall be compatiblewith the lamps furnished. Furnish number and size of ballasts as required to operatethe number of lamps indicated with the control schemes shown.

D. Fluorescent ballasts for light fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall beprogrammed start ballasts with the lamps wired in parallel. Failure of one lamp shallleave the rest of the lamps illuminated.

E. Fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be electronic, comply with the other requirementsfor electronic ballasts, be capable of smoothly and consistently dimming the lampsfrom full output to 10% or less output, and maintain a cathode voltage between 3-4volts. A compatible low/line voltage slide switch shall control the light level.

F. Emergency Lighting: Emergency lighting shall consist of normal lighting fixtures withgenerator or battery-inverter backup, emergency lighting fixtures with individualbattery backup, or sealed beam emergency lighting units in accordance with thefixture schedule found on the construction drawings.

a. Battery-backed LED emergency lighting fixtures shall consist of a normal LEDfixture with some or all of the LEDs connected to a battery and charger. Thebattery and charger may either be mounted remote from the fixture or bemounted integral to the fixture. Minimum light output shall be 1100 lumens.The battery shall be maintenance-free nickel cadmium and sized for aminimum of 90 minutes of continuous fixture operation. The charger shall besolid-state and provide overload, short circuit, brownout, and low batteryvoltage protection. The battery and charger shall include self-diagnostic andself-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for 5 minutes every month andfor 30 minutes every 6 months. The fixture shall include a test/monitor modulewith LED status indicating lights mounted so as to be visible to the public.

b. Battery-backed fluorescent emergency lighting fixtures shall consist of a normalfluorescent fixture with one or more lamps connected to a battery and charger.The battery and charger may either be mounted remote from the fixture or bemounted integral to the fixture. The battery shall be maintenance-free nickelcadmium and sized for a minimum of 90 minutes of continuous fixtureoperation. The charger shall be solid-state and provide overload, short circuit,brownout, and low battery voltage protection. The battery and charger shallinclude self-diagnostic and self-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for5 minutes every month and for 30 minutes every 6 months. The fixture shallinclude a test/monitor module with LED status indicating lights mounted so asto be visible to the public.

c. Sealed beam emergency lighting units shall consist of sealed beam LED lampsconnected to an internally mounted battery and charger. The entire unit shallbe suitable for wall or ceiling mounting as required. The battery shall be nickelcadmium and sized for a minimum of 90 minutes of continuous fixture

16500-4

operation. The charger shall be solid-state and provide overload, short circuit,brownout, and low battery voltage protection. The battery and charger shallinclude self-diagnostic and self-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for5 minutes every month and for 30 minutes every 6 months. The fixture shallinclude a test/monitor module with LED status indicating lights mounted so asto be visible to the public.

G. HID ballasts shall be of the high power factor type (0.9 or greater).

H. Where quartz restrike fixtures are fed at voltages different than 120V, they shall befurnished with integral transformers and all equipment necessary to feed the quartzfixtures at 120V.

I. Exit signs shall be of the LED type. Fluorescent, electro luminescent light panel, orself-powered luminous signs shall not be used.

a. LEDs shall be wired in parallel to prevent multi-lamp failure, and shall beconcealed within the sign by a clear panel and red optical diffuser. Powerconsumption shall not exceed 2 watts per face.

b. Exit signs shall have white die cast aluminum or polycarbonate housings withuniversal mounting brackets; brushed aluminum stencil faces with red lettersand multi-directional knockout arrows.

c. Exit signs shall be provided with emergency battery packs and battery chargerswhen required. Batteries shall be maintenance-free nickel cadmium, and shallbe mounted within the exit signs.

2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Provide all structural members necessary to support fixtures in locations shown onthe contract drawings. Submit mounting and support details to the Architect orEngineer for approval with the project shop drawings. Notify the General Contractorprior to bid of any structural work that will be required to support the fixtures.

B. Provide hangers, cords, stems, etc., where required. Coordinate with the Architector Engineer for proper stem lengths prior to ordering fixtures.

C. Support recessed troffers independently of the ceiling grid system by using aminimum of two safety wires on diagonally opposite corners of each fixture.

D. Support recessed downlights by using safety wires or by rigidly attaching the fixturesto the building structure.

E. Provide clips for fixtures installed in lay-in ceilings. Clips shall be equal to EricoCaddy clips # 515 or #515A.


16500-5

3.1 Raceways for lighting systems in accessible ceilings shall be run to junction boxesmounted in locations that do not interfere with the ceiling installation, the luminaireinstallation, or other building systems. Provide final connections to fixtures usingconductors in flexible conduit. Flexible conduit whips shall not exceed six feet in length.

3.2 Where fixtures are shown with dual switches, control all inner lamps with one switch andall outer lamps with the other switch. Where dimming or occupancy sensor-controlledfixtures are shown, control the fixtures in accordance with the appropriate wiring diagramor the Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.3 Install all night light and emergency fixtures (with battery packs) to the hot (unswitched)side of the lighting controls.

3.4 Located emergency lighting remote battery packs and remote test/monitor modulesidentically so their status indicating lights are visible to the public and they form a straightline when viewed from the end of the corridor or room.

3.5 Mount sealed beam emergency lighting units where shown on the construction drawingsand aim their lamps to illuminate the path of egress as uniformly as possible.

3.6 Provide an individual feed with a ground conductor from a junction box to each fixture.Lighting fixtures shall not be daisy-chained.

3.7 All recessed fixtures shall be mounted level with their trims flush against the ceiling.

3.8 Comply completely with all Manufacturers’ installation instructions.

3.9 Perform a visual and operational inspection of all fixtures and controls to verify that theyoperate properly and are clean/aligned prior to the pre-final inspection.

3.10 Provide the Owner and up to ten Owner’s Maintenance Personnel with a minimum of 2hours of on-site training by a qualified service Technician. This training shall includeregular operation, startup and shutdown, trouble-shooting, servicing, and preventativemaintenance procedures.

3.11 For non-LED lighting fixtures and components, provide a complete warranty for parts andlabor for a minimum of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Incandescentlamps shall be have a 90 day warranty.

3.12 For LED fixtures, lamps, drivers, and all other associated components, provide a completewarranty for parts and labor for a minimum of five years from the date of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION

16510-1

SECTION 16510OCCUPANCY SENSORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Furnish and install a complete system of Occupancy sensors and lighting controls as shown on thedrawings and as specified herein. The drawings are provided to show the general scope of the work,and show the absolute minimum components required. Actual system components, quantities, andlocations shall be determined by the lighting controls vendor and provided to the Contractor with theinstallation shop drawings.

1.2 The Contractor and Sales Representatives are advised to take notice of specified componentcharacteristics when attempting to select and propose substitutions. It is highly unlikely thatsubstitutions on a one-for-one component basis will produce results that provide acceptable systemperformance.

1.3 Provide all power packs, hardware, software, devices, circuitry, and other components, material, andlabor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to the satisfaction of the Architect, Owner,and Engineer.

1.4 Submit six sets of manufacturer’s cut sheets describing completely all equipment, and six sets of shopdrawings showing all circuitry including terminal-to-terminal connections.

1.5 The wiring diagrams on these drawings are based on our best interpretation of the manufacturer’s datathat was available at the time of design; however, they shall not be used for system installation andconfiguration. The controls equipment vendor is expected to be thoroughly knowledgeable of theequipment that is being proposed, and shall provide detailed shop drawings tailored for each circuit andlighting zone on the project. General manufacturer’s data sheets shall not be acceptable. The shopdrawings shall be suitable for the installing electrician to use for complete installation of the circuitrywithout referring to data sheets or installation manuals for connection of lighting control equipment.These requirements shall be followed whether the specified equipment, or products of othermanufacturers, is provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 See Legend Sheet for sensor types.

2.2 Power Packs: Power packs shall be of the same manufacturer as the occupancy sensors. Each shallbe capable of controlling a 20-ampere circuit. They shall be rated for operation at the voltage of thesystem on which they will be used.

2.3 Dimmers: Dimmers shall be 0-10V dimming protocol. Compatibility between the fixture drivers anddimmers provided shall be documented. Switches with integral dimmers shall be line voltage switchesand rated for the switched load.

2.4 Circuitry: Provide control circuitry as required by the manufacturer for optimum system operation, butno less than the following: Control cables shall be 3-conductor #22 AWG copper with an overall jacket.Adjust conductor sizes as required to overcome unacceptable voltage drop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Occupancy sensors shall be provided so that their coverage areas overlap and there are no dead zonesin the rooms where persons may stand and not be detected.

16510-2

3.2 Low voltage circuitry shall be provided from each dimmer switch to the fixtures being controlled.

3.3 All work shall be done by qualified system technicians.

3.4 Wiring, including control wiring, shall be in Raceways meeting Specification 16110.

3.5 Guarantee workmanship and material for a period of one year after final acceptance. During thewarranty period, repair or replace faulty equipment at no cost to the Owner for labor, material, orexpenses.

3.6 Upon completion of job, test entire system. After testing submit a certificate to the Architect statingverification of the following:

PART 4 – CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS

4.1 Provide the following documents to the Architect for delivery to the Owner at the time of substantialcompletion:A. Written GuaranteeB. Two sets of data prepared by the manufacturer for each item of electrical equipment completely

describing each piece of equipment. The data shall include parts lists, a description of operation,shop drawings, wiring diagrams, maintenance procedures, and other literature required foroperation and maintenance of equipment.

4.2 Instruct the Owner on system operational procedures. Notify the Owner and Architect at least one weekin advance of the training session. Provide written step-by-step instructional material.

4.3 Notify the General Contractor that you are to present during the Pre-final Inspection. During thatinspection, demonstrate all system functionality and capabilities; remove cover plates and panels coversas required to show the quality of the installation. The Owner, Architect, and Engineer reserve the rightto reject unsuitable workmanship or performance.

END OF SECTION

16710-1

SECTION 16710FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install a complete and operable fire alarm system in accordance with theContract drawings and all federal, state, and local codes. Equipment on the drawingsrepresents the absolute minimum required for the project. Include costs for all otherrequired devices and equipment required for a complete and operable code compliantsystem. Notify the engineer in writing of any devices required by code, but not shown,at least ten days prior to bid.

B. Comply completely with the latest edition of all applicable federal, state, and localcodes including, but not limited to the following:1) National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)2) Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)3) National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)4) The International Building Code5) ANSI/ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all enclosures, hardware, software, devices, and all other components,material, and labor required to install, configure, and test the entire system to thesatisfaction of the Engineer and all authorities.

B. All components of the system shall be manufactured by the same company. Thesystem and its components shall be approved by UL and Factory Mutual.

C. All system components shall be installed by a franchised distributor of the fire alarmsystem having a repair and service department on call 24 hours a day, seven days aweek. The repair and service department shall be located within 150 miles of theproject.

D. Submit complete shop drawings showing all devices including mounting locations andheights and terminal-to-terminal connections. Employ an independent third partytesting agency that shall be responsible for certification of the system and toreview the shop drawings to ensure compliance with the contract documentsand all applicable codes. A NICET Level III certified technician shall perform thedesign review and system testing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Provide an intelligent, addressable fire alarm control panel complete with all equipmentnecessary to monitor and control the devices shown. The system shall sound a non-coded general alarm. Upon an alarm condition, the fire alarm control panel shallautomatically report the alarm condition to a monitoring agency. Provide all telephone

16710-2

connections, circuitry, and conduit to perform this functionality back to the telephonebackboard.

2.2 Provide a NiCad battery sized to operate the control panel without normal power for 24hours, and then to alarm the panel continuously for at least five minutes. Submit batterysizing calculations with the Manufacturer’s cut sheets and shop drawings.

2.3 All devices shall be addressable and shall be electrically supervised.

2.4 Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type.

2.5 Duct detectors shall be of the air sampling type. Furnish complete with sampling tubesand duct housings.

2.6 Smoke detectors mounted under raised computer floors shall be of the photoelectric type.They shall be UL listed for installation in plenums.

2.7 Pull stations shall be of metallic construction. They shall be furnished with lexan shieldsand warning horns.

2.8 Horns shall be rated a minimum of 85 dB at 10’.

2.9 Speakers shall be square. They shall be wall-mounted to a 4” square box. They shallproduce a minimum sound level of 85dB at 10’. They shall have adjustable taps forvolume level adjustment.

2.10 Strobes shall have a nominal rating of at least 75 Cd.

2.11 Combination horn-strobe units or speaker-strobe units shall meet the specifiedrequirements of the individual horns, strobes, and speakers.

2.12 Monitor all sprinkler system flow switches at the facility. Provide an alarm upon flowindication.

2.13 Monitor all sprinkler system tamper and supervisory switches at the facility. Provide atrouble signal upon tamper indication.

2.14 Provide duct detectors in the return duct of all air units. If a fresh air intake duct is installed,all duct detectors shall be mounted upstream of the intake duct. For air units with flowratings greater than 15,000 CFM, provide duct detectors in both the return and supplyducts.

2.15 Provide all necessary relays and circuitry, and shut down all air units upon an alarmcondition of the fire alarm system.

2.16 Provide all necessary equipment and circuitry for control of the elevator in accordance withANSI/ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

2.17 Provide all necessary equipment and circuitry to automatically release the magnetic doorlocks upon an alarm of the Fire Alarm System.

16710-3

2.18 Conductors shall be #14 AWG copper rated THHN/THWN. Provide larger conductorswhere required to compensate for voltage drop.


3.1 All components and circuitry shall be assembled and installed per the requirements of allapplicable codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2 All devices shall be mounted with their boxes flush in the walls.

3.3 Smoke detectors shall be mounted at least 36” away from supply vents.

3.4 All outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cover plates shall be painted red.

3.5 All circuitry shall be in concealed conduit sized per the NEC, but no less than ½” EMT. Allfire alarm conduits shall be painted red.

3.6 The Fire Alarm System Contractor shall employ an independent third party testingagency to test and certify all system components, including each smoke detector,duct detector, and pull station prior to the pre-final inspection. The third partytesting agency shall provide a complete signed test report to the Owner, Architect,and Engineer. The individual performing the testing and certification shall be NICETLevel III certified. A copy of the individual’s certification shall be provided alongwith the signed test report. All systems shall be completely operable prior to therequest for a pre-final site observation. The system shall be tested in the presenceof the Owner, Architect, and Engineer at the pre-final site observation.

3.7 Provide a one-year warranty for the system and all components. The warranty shall beginat the date of final acceptance of the building. During the warranty period, the systemshall be repaired or replaced as necessary at no cost to the Owner. During the warrantyperiod, a technician shall be on the job site within twenty-four hours of a problem reportfrom the Owner.

END OF SECTION

16801-1

SECTION 16801TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

Provide a complete system of raceways, outlet boxes, and pull wires for the telephone and datasystems in accordance with this specification and the contract drawings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes shall be furnished per Specification Section 16150.

2.2 Plaster rings with single-gang outlet openings shall be furnished unless otherwise noted.

2.3 Raceways shall be furnished per Specification Section 16110. Minimum conduit size shallbe 1” nominal trade size.

2.4 Provide all outlets with blank, brushed stainless steel cover plates.

2.5 Telephone and Data Backboard: Wall mount a ¾” x 4’ x 8’ sheet of plywood, primed andpainted with two coats of fire retardant paint of the color and finish selected by theArchitect. Provide a ¼” x 4” x 17.75” copper ground block (Erico Eritech TMGB-A18L23PT or approved equal) on the wall, bond a #1/0 AWG copper conductor to theground block with a two hole compression lug and run the #1/0 AWG ground wire to theelectrical power system ground. Bond the #1/0 AWG ground wire to the power systemground bar.


3.1 Mount the bottom of each backboard at 6” above the finished floor. Mount the backboardsecurely to the wall framing members.

3.2 Provide a #1/0 copper ground wire in 1” PVC conduit from the Telephone and DataBackboard to the Building Power System Ground. Bond the #1/0 copper ground wire tothe power system ground bar.

3.3 Extend a 1” conduit from each outlet box to a point above the nearest accessible ceiling.Turn the conduit horizontal and terminate it with a protective bushing. Provide all conduitswith pullstrings.

3.4 Service Conduits: Provide two 2” PVC conduits with long radius elbows from theTelephone and Data Backboard to the telephone company right-of-way. Conduits bendsshall contain radii that are no less than 10 times the conduit diameter. Coordinate theexact termination point with the telephone company. Comply completely with all telephonecompany requirements. Furnish conduits with pullstrings rated a minimum of 600 poundspulling tension. Stub conduits up 4” above the floor at the Telephone and Data Backboardand cover with plastic caps. Do not glue the caps on the conduits. Seal conduits belowgrade to prohibit the entrance, of dirt, water, and gases. Service conduits shall be buried24” to 36” below grade. Mark the end of the conduits by placing a vertical stick of conduit

16801-2

from the end of the conduit vertically to a point at least 12” above grade. Provide physicalprotection as well as warning tape attached to stakes around the marker.

3.5 Equip all service conduits and intermediate distribution frame conduits with a pullwire orstring capable of withstanding 600 pounds of pulling tension. Outlet box pullwires orstrings shall be capable of withstanding 200 pounds of pulling tension.

END OF SECTION

16810-1 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 16810- VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 -GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems" for commonly used

electrical supports and installation requirements.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

16810-2 VIBRATION CONTROLSFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

7. Vibration Isolation. B. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 9. or approved equal

C. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad

area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze members with clamps approved for the application by the authorities having jurisdiction.

16810-3 VIBRATION CONTROLSFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL MOTION

A Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways

where they cross joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

D OF SECTION 16810

31 01 001 Earthwork

SECTION 31 01 00 EARTHWORK

I. GENERAL

A. DESCRIPTION - Work Specified Herein and Elsewhere

Work under this Section includes:

1. Site preparation 2. Shoring, sheeting, and bracing 3. Pipeline trenching, bedding and backfilling. 4. Dewatering and drainage 5. Excavation for manholes, wet wells, junction boxes, meter valves, existing

pipe tie ins, and other minor structures. 6. Compaction control and testing 7. Finish grading

B. BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS

Maintain all bench marks, monuments, and other reference points; if destroyed, replacement cost will be deducted from payments due the Contractor.

C. LAYING OUT WORK

1. The Engineer will establish the permanent base line(s), property lines, easement lines, and permanent bench marks.

2. The Contractor shall stake out the construction, establish lines and levels,

temporary bench marks, batter boards, centerlines and reference points for the work and verify all dimensions relating to interconnection with existing features. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any errors in these lines and levels.

3. The Contractor shall report any inconsistencies in the proposed grades,

lines and levels, dimensions and locations to the Engineer before commencing work.

D. CLASSIFICATION

Excavation will be unclassified regardless of the nature of the materials encountered.

31 01 002 Earthwork

E. RESPONSIBILITY

1. The structural strength and safety of all sheeting, shoring and bracing shall

be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, to repair any damage resulting from failure to provide adequate supports.

2. Provide timber work, shoring, bracing, sheeting, and sheet piling where

necessary to retain banks of excavations, prevent cave-in of adjacent ground, prevent displacement of utilities and structures, and to protect public safety.

3. The Contractor is solely responsible for the design, installation, and

operation of dewatering systems and their safety and conformity with local codes and regulations.

F. COMPACTION DENSITY TESTING

Backfilling of all trenches, manholes, meter valves, and tie in connections shall be observed by the Engineer, to ensure that maximum effort is used to obtain maximum density of the removed and replaced materials. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to give the Engineer reasonable notice before backfilling. Observance by the Engineer, in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her responsibility in obtaining maximum density.

II PRODUCTS

A. GENERAL

It is intended that previously excavated materials conforming to the following requirements be utilized wherever possible.

A. TRENCH OR EXCAVATION BOTTOM STABILIZATION MATERIAL

Provide coarse angular granular stabilization material, at least 70% of which shall range in size from 3/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches.

A. SAND

Sand shall be well graded, organic free, durable, granular material, and shall pass a No. 4 sieve. Not more than 15 percent shall pass a No. 200 sieve.

A. PIT RUN GRAVEL

31 01 003 Earthwork

Pit run gravel shall be organic free and shall pass a 3/4 inch sieve.

A. GRANULAR MATERIAL

Granular material shall be well graded, organic and soil free, durable aggregate and shall pass a 3/4 inch sieve. Not more than 15 percent shall pass a No. 200 sieve.

A. GRANULAR FILL

Granular fill shall consist primarily of sand and gravel, free from vegetation and other deleterious material. Any coarse aggregate contained in the material shall pass the 1-1/2 inch sieve. Not more than 15 percent shall pass the No. 200 sieve.

A. GRANULAR BEDDING

1. Granular bedding shall be Class II Bedding, in accordance with ASTM

D2321-89.

A. TOP SOIL

1. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural topsoil typical of the area, free from subsoil, stones, plants, roots or other extraneous material and shall not be used while muddy or frozen.

2. Topsoil shall contain not less than 8% organic matter (AASHTO t194).

The topsoil shall consist of either natural top soils typical of the locality and free from coarse stone aggregate or surface soils stripped from the site and enriched with humus at a rate of 8% by volume. The soil mixture prepared by mixing the surface soil and humus shall be free of oil, cinders, coarse stone, and woody root material.

II EXECUTION

A. SITE PREPARATION

1. Protection of Trees and Shrubs

Existing decorative trees and shrubs shall remain, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Protect branches, trunks, and roots of trees and shrubs that are to remain. Trees to remain in the construction area shall be boxed, fenced, or otherwise protected before any work is started;

31 01 004 Earthwork

remove boxing when directed by the Engineer. Do not permit heavy equipment or stockpiles within branch spread. Remove interfering branches without injury to trunks and cover scars with tree paint.

2. Relocation of Utilities

Active utilities shall be supported and protected from damage. After obtaining the utility owner’s approval, relocate or remove active utilities which will interfere with work as indicated. The Contractor shall pay for all damage to active utilities and for relocation or removal of all interfering utilities.

3. Disposal of Debris

All debris and refuse from construction operations shall be disposed of in a legal manner at the expense of the Contractor.

A. SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING

1. Furnish, install and maintain without additional compensation, sheeting,

bracing, and shoring support required to keep excavation, and to prevent any movement which may damage adjacent pavements or structures, damage or delay the work, or endanger life and health. Voids outside the supports shall be immediately filled and compacted.

2. Sheeting, where required, shall be driven below the bottom of excavation

so the lowest set of whalers and struts are above the bottom of the excavation to allow necessary working room.

3. The Engineer may direct in writing that supports in trenches be cut off at

any specified elevation, in which case no extra compensation shall be made.

4. The Contractor may leave in place, to be embedded in the backfill of

excavation, any or all supports for the purpose of preventing injury to persons or property, whether public or private. However, no supports which are within 4 feet of the ground or pavement may be left in place without written permission by the Engineer.

5. All supports not left in place shall be removed in such a manner as to

avoid endangering the piping, structures, utilities or property, whether public or private. All voids left by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be

31 01 005 Earthwork

immediately filled and compacted.

6. The right of the Engineer to order supports left in place shall not be construed as creating an obstruction on his part to issue such orders. Failure by the Engineer to exercise this right shall not relieve the Contractor from total liability for damages to persons or property resulting from the failure of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient supports to prevent any caving or moving of the ground adjacent to the excavation.

A. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide suitable temporary drainage channels for any water that may flow

along or across the work as specified hereafter.

2. Provide barriers, warning lights and other protective devises at all excavations, as directed by the Engineer.

3. Sidewalks, roads, streets, and pavements shall not be blocked or

obstructed by excavated material, except as authorized by the Engineer, in which case adequate temporary provisions must be made for satisfactory temporary passage of Owner’s operating personnel, pedestrians, and vehicles. Minimize inconvenience to public travel or to tenants occupying adjoining property.

4. Where it is necessary to place excavated material adjacent to buildings,

erect barriers to keep earth at least 4 feet from such buildings. Earth deposited on lawns shall be promptly and carefully removed to preserve the turf. All trees, shrubs, etc., shall be protected.

5. If open excavations cross existing rigid surfacing, the surfacing shall be

removed for a width of one foot beyond the anticipated edge of excavation. The pavement break shall be sawed to insure a straight joint. Surface replacement shall match existing surface. Where open excavation is allowed along or across public roadways, excavation, backfill, and surface replacement shall conform to the requirements of all permits applicable thereto. In no case shall surface replacement edges bear less than 12 inches of undisturbed soil.

6. If underground utilities and/or structures are encountered, notify the

Engineer and do not proceed until instructions are obtained. Notify the Engineer if springs or running water are encountered.

A. DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE

31 01 006 Earthwork

At all times during construction keep excavations free from standing water. Sumps, if required, shall be located outside of load bearing areas so that the bearing surfaces will not be disturbed. Water pumped from the excavation shall be discharged to prevent re-entry into soil strata being dewatered. Water containing silt in suspension shall not be pumped into sewer lines or adjacent streams. The method of disposing of water pumped from the excavation shall be approved by the Engineer, prior to the actual disposal.

A. PIPELINE TRENCHING

1. Excavation of trenches shall not advance more than 50 feet ahead of

completed pipe installation except as approved by the Engineer.

2. Excavation in close proximity to existing utilities shall be performed in a manner to prevent damage. Contact representatives of utilities for assistance in locating buried lines.

3. All excavations shall be made by open cut unless otherwise indicated.

Sides of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible from the trench bottom to a level of one foot above the top of the pipe. Trench bottoms shall be excavated true to lie and shall not be less than 18 inches wider nor more than 24 inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe so a clear space of 9 to 12 inches is provided on each side of the pipe. Minimum trench width for small diameter pipe shall be 24 inches. Grade of the trench bottom shall be consistent with the method of bedding specified.

A. MINOR STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION

1. Minor structures are defined as manholes, junction boxes, meter vaults,

etc. Do not excavated for any structures until that structure is scheduled for construction. Excavate only to the depth and dimensions necessary for the construction.

2. The bottom of all excavations shall be undisturbed earth unless otherwise

indicated, and shall be approved by the Engineer before any subsequent work is started.

3. Excavations carried below depths indicated on the drawings without the

previous approval of the Engineer, shall be filled with well compacted granular fill to the correct level at the expense of the Contractor.

31 01 007 Earthwork

4. Maintain excavations in good order. If the bearing capacity of the foundation soils is reduced because the excavation is allowed to remain open prior to commencing work, the weathered soil shall be removed and replaced with well compacted granular fill at the expense of the Contractor.

A. STABILIZATION

If portions of the bottom of trenches or excavations consists of material unstable to such a degree that, in the opinion of the Engineer, it cannot adequately support the pipe or structure, the bottom shall be undercut and stabilized with approved coarse granular stabilization material. Depth of stabilization shall be as directed by the Engineer.

A. BEDDING AND COVER FOR PIPING

1. GENERAL

a. Bedding is defined as the shaped and tamped material which

supports piping. Cover is defined as the compacted material which covers and protects piping, and which extends from the top of the bedding material to a point one foot above the top of the pipe. Backfill, as specified hereafter, is defined as the material extending above the top of the pipe cover to topsoil, paving subgrade, or foundation level.

b. All buried piping shall be continuously bedded and covered, except

where concrete encasement, concrete cradles, or boring and jacking are indicated. The following are minimum requirements for pipe bedding and cover, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2. PIPE BEDDING

a. Pipe bedding shall consist undercutting the trench bottom and

refilling to proper grade with a minimum of 3 inches of Class II Bedding in accordance with ASTM D2321-89, which shall be used for all flexible pipe, and in either case, the proper strength pipe is used with the specified bedding to support the anticipated loading.

b. Following placement of pipe and inspection of joints, tamped

bedding material shall be continued upward for the full width of the trench to the following levels:

31 01 008 Earthwork

PIPE DIAMETER LEVEL

1. 12" to 30" To the horizontal centerline of the pipe.

2. less than 12" To one foot above the top of the pipe

(Combined bedding and cover)

3. PIPE COVER

a. After completion of bedding and preliminary approval of piping and/or testing, the pipe shall be covered to a point one foot above the top of the pipe for the full trench width. Cover material shall be sand, pit run gravel or previously excavated granular material free of clay lumps, large stones or rocks, and debris. For pipe less than 12 inches in diameter, cover has been previously provided under bedding. For pipes greater than 18 inches in diameter, cover material may be finely pulverized non-cohesive (non-clay), non-organic, previously excavated soil, free from lumps, rocks, and debris, and subject to the approval of the Engineer, except where granular backfill is hereafter specified above the cover.

b. All cover material shall be carefully deposited to avoid damage to

the pipe and shall be compacted as specified hereafter.

I. TRENCH BACKFILLING

1. After bedding and cover have been placed to a level of one foot above the

top of the pipe, backfilling procedures shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

SURFACE FEATURE METHOD

a. Unimproved areas, drop land, parks, Undeveloped recreation areas.................................. 1

b. Lawns, boulevards, landscaped areas,

plant site................................................................. 2

c. Unpaved parkway strips, drives and alleys...............

31 01 009 Earthwork

2

d. Aggregate surfaced streets, alleys, driveways,

highway shoulders, and parking areas...................... 2 or 3

e. Non-rigid bituminous paving including “oil

& chip” and Class A series bituminous treatments................................................................ 2 or 3

f. Rigid surfacing including bituminous concrete

portland cement, and brick paving............................ 4

g. Influence area below existing rigid surfacing, foundations, utilities, etc........................................... 5

“Influence Area” shall be considered the area within lines sloped downward 45 degrees from the outer edges of paving, foundations, and utility lines.

2. METHOD 1

From the top of the pipe cover to the surface of the ground, backfill consisting of previously excavated soil free of frozen material and large rocks may be deposited by dragline, bulldozer, or other suitable equipment. Depositing in layers or tamping will not be required. Sufficient surplus excavated material shall be neatly rounded over the trench to compensate for settlement.

3. METHOD 2

Non cohesive backfill shall be deposited in accordance with Method 1, except backfill shall be adequately wetted and mechanically compacted. Paving, if any, shall not be placed until surface subsidence has occurred, a minimum 30 days after compacting, or as approved by the Engineer.

4. METHOD 3

All backfill material shall be approved granular material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Backfill may be deposited by bulldozer, dragline, or direct dumping, exercising care to prevent displacement of the

31 01 0010 Earthwork

pipe. Depositing in layers and compacting will not be required..

5. METHOD 4

Backfill shall be granular material as specified in Method 3. The granular backfill shall be carefully deposited in uniform lifts, and each lift shall be wetted adequately and compacted with vibratory compactors, as specified hereafter.

6. METHOD 5

Backfilling shall consist of using Method 4 in the area of influence under the foundation or utility, and above that level to the surface using the backfill method required by the surface features. The area of influence shall be considered the area under a line sloped downward at 45 degrees from the near edge of the foundation or utility.

J. MINOR STRUCTURAL BACKFILL

1. GENERAL

a. Do not backfill until new concrete has properly cured, coatings have been approved, and any required tests have been accepted.

b. Exercise care during backfilling operations to avoid any puncture,

break or other damage to waterproofing systems, if any. Backfill adjacent to waterproofing in the presence of the Engineer.

c. Where backfilling wet wells and manholes, backfill and compact

simultaneously on opposite sides in even layers. Other backfilling sequences shall be as specifically noted.

2. MATERIALS

a. Backfill in crop lands, lawns and landscaped areas shall be

previously excavated materials free from cinders, construction debris, vegetation or other extraneous material and suitable for the intended purpose.

b. Backfill in influence areas beneath piping, foundations, and paving

shall be approved granular material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.


K. PIPELINE TESTING AND CLEANUP

1. Provide for testing and cleanup as soon as practicable, so these operations do not lag far behind pipe installation. Perform preliminary cleanup and grading operations immediately after backfilling.

2. As sections of piping are completed, conduct tests in accordance with

project requirements.

L. COMPACTION

1. FILL PLACEMENT

a. If fill placed has already loosened as a result of frost action, the fill shall be recompacted prior to placing additional lifts. Compacted material that has been flooded and no longer meets the density specified shall be removed and replaced.

b. Where fill is required on both sides of structures, fill and compact

simultaneously on opposite sides in even layers. Other filling sequences shall be as specifically indicated on the drawings.


c. All materials shall be placed in loose lift thicknesses indicated hereafter.

2. GENERAL

a. Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for granular materials, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

b. Non-cohesive soils shall be compacted with vibrating roller or equivalent; cohesive soils shall be

compacted with sheep-foot roller, pneumatic tamping, or approved equivalent, unless otherwise indicated.

3. FILL LIFT THICKNESS AND COMPACTION DENSITIES

Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, place fills in the loose lift thicknesses indicated hereafter, except when water jetting, and compact to dry density not less than the following percentage of maximum dry density, determined by the Standard Proctor Test, ASTM D698, unless otherwise noted.


Type of Fill Usage Lift Thickness Compaction ASTM Trenched Pipe Bedding Beneath Piping 6” 95 D698 Trench Pipe Cover` Over and/or around piping 6” 95 D698 Utilities Trench Backfill “Influence area” beneath other piping 8” 95 D698 “Influence area” beneath rigid paving and railroad tracks 6” 95 D698 Adjacent to or under structures 6” 98 D698 Crop lands, plant site, lawns and landscaped areas 12” 85 D698 Structural Fill All locations under minor structures (manholes, etc) 6” 95 D698 Granular Fill Below concrete slab bedding, foundations, rigid pavement, and excavated

areas adjacent to structures 8” 95 D698

All other uses 12” 85 D698 Granular Bedding Beneath concrete slabs 6” 95 D698 Structural Backfilling See Trench Backfill D698 General Site Grading Fill in other locations not covered herein 12” 85 Topsoil placement 12” 85 D698

M. FINISH GRADING

1. GENERAL

Provide all topsoil placement and finish grading and filling to achieve the lines and grades. All earthwork shall be done in a manner that provides drainage.

2. TOPSOIL PLACEMENT


Place topsoil in all areas of new grading. The compacted subgrade to receive topsoil shall be scarified to a depth of 3 inches. Topsoil shall be spread evenly and compacted to a thickness of not less than 4 inches, 12 inches in crop lands, and to the proposed elevations and grades. Grade flush with walks, curbs and paving.

3. FINISH GRADING

a. Except where mounding over trenches is specified, all areas of the

project including all previously grassed areas that have been disturbed, and adjacent transition areas shall be uniformly smooth graded. Depressions from settlement shall be filled and compacted. Tops of embankments and breaks in grade shall be rounded. All surfaces shall be finished to provide adequate drainage. Finished surfaces shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, free from irregular surface changes and comparable to the smoothness obtained by grader blade operations.

b. Slope grades to drain away from structures at a minimum of 1/4

inch per foot for 10 feet.

c. Finished surfaces adjacent to paved or surfaced areas and within 10 feet of structures shall be within 0.1 feet of the proposed grade. All other areas shall be within 0.25 feet of the proposed grade.

d. Newly graded areas shall be protected from traffic and erosion.

All settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause prior to seeding or acceptance shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes at no additional cost to the owner.

e. Unless otherwise indicated, all surplus earthwork materials shall be

disposed of by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

SCOPE:

TIE-IN NEW SEWER SERVICE TO EXISTING SEWER LINE

The work will consist of furnishing all necessary labor, materials and equipment for the complete connection of the new sewer service to the existing sewer system.

MATERIALS:

Pipe: Pipe shall conform to specifications as set out elsewhere in these specifications.

FITTINGS:

Fittings at the connection of the sewer distribution system to the existing sewer distribution system shall conform, to the materials specification found under ductile iron pipe and fittings. Other fittings that may be required shall be the same as specified for the distribution system.

INSTALLATION:

Unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER, all pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for installation.

TESTING:

Testing of lines and connections shall be in accordance with the methods described under the specifications for ductile iron pipe and fittings.

CAUSES FOR REJECTION:

Rejection of the connections of distribution system to existing distribution system by the OWNER may occur when any of, but not limited to, the following conditions occur:

1. Failure to meet the leakage test. 2. Failure to properly consolidate backfill of lines. 3. Failure to follow the manufacturer's or ENGINEER'S instructions on the

proper installation of the various items of work.

MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT:

Connection of the sewer new sewer service to the existing sewer system will be paid for at the price stated in the accepted proposal per each installed or authorized and directed by the ENGINEER. This payment will be considered full compensation for all materials, equipment and labor used in connection with this pay item, including fittings and testings.

Kelly

Typewritten Text

SECTION 33 05 5.1

Kelly

Typewritten Text

Kelly

Typewritten Text

Kelly

Typewritten Text

Kelly

Typewritten Text

Kelly

Typewritten Text

Kelly

Typewritten Text

END OF SECTION

Kelly

Typewritten Text

33005 5.1-1SERVICE TIE IN TO EXISTING SEWER